Relion 630 series

Power Management PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Document ID: 1MRS757256 Issued: 2013-10-14 Revision: D Product version: 1.2

Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/ or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks. This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network. It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessary measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.) to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included, against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages and/or losses. This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................15
This manual......................................................................................15 Intended audience............................................................................15 Product documentation.....................................................................15 Product documentation set..........................................................15 Document revision history...........................................................16 Related documentation................................................................17 Symbols and conventions.................................................................17 Symbols.......................................................................................17 Document conventions................................................................18 Functions, codes and symbols....................................................18

Section 2

PML630 overview...........................................................21
Overview...........................................................................................21 Product version history.....................................................................22 PCM600 and IED connectivity package version...............................22 Local HMI.........................................................................................23 Display.........................................................................................23 LEDs............................................................................................26 Keypad........................................................................................26 Web HMI...........................................................................................27 Command buttons.......................................................................28 Authorization.....................................................................................29 Communication.................................................................................30

Section 3

Basic functions...............................................................31
User authentication...........................................................................31 Authority check ATHCHCK..........................................................31 Functionality ..........................................................................31 Operation principle.................................................................31 Settings..................................................................................32 Authority status ATHSTAT..........................................................32 Function block........................................................................32 Functionality...........................................................................33 Operation principle ................................................................33 Signals....................................................................................33 Settings..................................................................................33 Local human-machine interface LHMI..............................................34 Local HMI screen behaviour........................................................34 Settings..................................................................................34

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Local HMI signals........................................................................34 Function block........................................................................34 Signals....................................................................................35 Basic part for the LED indication module....................................35 Function block........................................................................35 Functionality ..........................................................................35 Operation principle.................................................................36 Signals....................................................................................44 Settings..................................................................................44 Display part for HMI function keys control module......................45 Function block........................................................................45 Functionality ..........................................................................45 Operation principle ................................................................45 Signals....................................................................................47 Settings..................................................................................47 IED identifiers TERMINALID............................................................48 Functionality................................................................................48 Application...................................................................................48 Customer-specific settings.....................................................48 Settings........................................................................................49 Product information..........................................................................49 Functionality................................................................................49 Settings........................................................................................49 Primary system values PRIMVAL.....................................................49 Functionality ...............................................................................49 Application ..................................................................................50 Settings........................................................................................50 Global phase base values BASEPH.................................................50 Functionality................................................................................50 Settings........................................................................................51 The principles for voltage settings given in pu.............................51 Parameter setting group handling....................................................51 Functionality................................................................................51 Setting group handling SETGRPS..............................................52 Settings..................................................................................52 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP..........................................52 Function block........................................................................52 Signals....................................................................................52 Settings..................................................................................53 Operation principle......................................................................53 Application...................................................................................54 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI...............................................55 Functionality ...............................................................................55
2 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_1.................................55 Function block........................................................................55 Signals....................................................................................55 Settings..................................................................................56 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_2.................................58 Signals....................................................................................58 Settings..................................................................................59 Application...................................................................................60 Operation principle .....................................................................60 Measured value expander block MVEXP.........................................63 Function block.............................................................................63 Functionality ...............................................................................63 Operation principle .....................................................................64 Application ..................................................................................64 Signals.........................................................................................64 Settings........................................................................................65 Fixed signals FXDSIGN....................................................................65 Function block.............................................................................65 Functionality................................................................................65 Operation principle......................................................................65 Application...................................................................................66 Signals.........................................................................................66 Settings........................................................................................66 Event counter CNTGGIO..................................................................66 Function block.............................................................................66 Functionality................................................................................66 Operation principle......................................................................67 Reporting................................................................................67 Technical data.............................................................................67 Test mode functionality TESTMODE................................................68 Function block.............................................................................68 Functionality ...............................................................................68 Operation principle......................................................................68 Application ..................................................................................69 Signals.........................................................................................69 Settings........................................................................................70 Disturbance record DRRDRE...........................................................70 Disturbance report DRRDRE.......................................................70 Function block........................................................................70 Functionality...........................................................................70 Operation principle.................................................................71 Application..............................................................................77 Signals....................................................................................79
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 3

Table of contents

Settings..................................................................................79 Monitored data.......................................................................79 Analog input signals A1RADR and A2RADR .............................80 Function block........................................................................80 Signals....................................................................................80 Settings..................................................................................81 Analog input signals A3RADR and A4RADR..............................82 Function block........................................................................82 Signals....................................................................................82 Settings..................................................................................82 Binary input signals BxRBDR......................................................83 Function block........................................................................83 Signals....................................................................................84 Settings..................................................................................84 Technical data.............................................................................85 Self supervision with internal event list.............................................86 Functionality................................................................................86 Internal error signals INTERRSIG...............................................86 Function block........................................................................86 Signals....................................................................................86 Settings..................................................................................86 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST.............................................86 Settings..................................................................................86 Operation principle......................................................................87 Internal signals.......................................................................88 Run-time model......................................................................90 Application...................................................................................91 Technical data.............................................................................92 Time synchronization........................................................................92 Functionality................................................................................92 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN.....................................93 Settings..................................................................................93 Time synchronization via SNTP..................................................93 Settings..................................................................................93 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN............................94 Settings..................................................................................94 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND.................................95 Settings..................................................................................95 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE................................................95 Settings..................................................................................95 Time synchronization via IRIG-B.................................................96 Settings..................................................................................96 Operation principle......................................................................96
4 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Real-time clock operation.......................................................97 Synchronization alternatives..................................................98 Application ..................................................................................99 Technical data...........................................................................100 Denial of service.............................................................................100 Functionality .............................................................................100 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT.................................................................................100 Function block......................................................................100 Signals..................................................................................101 Settings................................................................................101 Monitored data.....................................................................101 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1..................................................................................102 Function block......................................................................102 Signals..................................................................................102 Settings................................................................................102 Monitored data.....................................................................102 Operation principle ...................................................................103 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................103 Functionality .............................................................................103 Communication interfaces and protocols..................................103 Application.................................................................................104 Horizontal communication via GOOSE................................106 Settings......................................................................................109 Technical data...........................................................................110 GOOSE receive GOOSEPWRFDRRCV........................................110 Function block...........................................................................110 Functionality..............................................................................110 Signals.......................................................................................110 Settings......................................................................................111 GOOSE receive GOOSEPWRSRCRCV........................................112 Function block...........................................................................112 Functionality..............................................................................112 Signals.......................................................................................113 Settings......................................................................................114 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV.........................................................................115 Function block...........................................................................115 Signals.......................................................................................115 Settings......................................................................................117 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................118 Function block...........................................................................118 Signals.......................................................................................118
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 5

Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................119 GOOSE function block to receive a double point GOOSEDPRCV..............................................................................120 Function block...........................................................................120 Functionality..............................................................................120 Operation principle ...................................................................120 Signals.......................................................................................120 Settings......................................................................................121 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV.............................................................................121 Function block...........................................................................121 Functionality .............................................................................121 Operation principle ...................................................................121 Signals.......................................................................................122 Settings......................................................................................122 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV.............................................................................123 Function block...........................................................................123 Functionality .............................................................................123 Operation principle ...................................................................123 Signals.......................................................................................123 Settings......................................................................................124 GOOSE function block to receive data sets required for load shedding GOOSEINTMVRCV........................................................125 Function block...........................................................................125 Functionality..............................................................................125 Signals.......................................................................................126 Settings......................................................................................127 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV..............................................................................127 Function block...........................................................................127 Functionality .............................................................................127 Operation principle ...................................................................127 Signals.......................................................................................128 Settings......................................................................................128 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function SPGGIO..............128 Function block...........................................................................128 Functionality .............................................................................128 Operation principle ...................................................................129 Application.................................................................................129 Signals.......................................................................................129 Settings......................................................................................129 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO.....................................................................................130
6 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................130 Functionality..............................................................................130 Operation principle ...................................................................130 Signals.......................................................................................131 Settings......................................................................................131 Monitored data...........................................................................131 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function MVGGIO.............132 Function block...........................................................................132 Functionality..............................................................................132 Operation principle ...................................................................133 Application.................................................................................133 Signals.......................................................................................133 Settings......................................................................................133 Monitored data...........................................................................134 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO............134 Function block...........................................................................134 Functionality .............................................................................134 Operation principle....................................................................135 Signals.......................................................................................135 Settings......................................................................................135 Configurable logic blocks................................................................135 Standard configurable logic blocks............................................135 Functionality.........................................................................135 OR function block.................................................................136 Inverter function block INVERTER.......................................137 PULSETIMER function block ..............................................138 Controllable gate function block GATE................................138 Exclusive OR function block XOR........................................139 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY..............................140 Timer function block TIMERSET..........................................141 AND function block ..............................................................142 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY....................143 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY...........144 Configurable logic Q/T...............................................................145 Functionality ........................................................................145 ORQT function block ...........................................................145 INVERTERQT function block ..............................................146 Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT..........................146 XORQT function block..........................................................147 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT........................148 ANDQT function block .........................................................150 Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT.............................151 Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT ...........................152
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 7

Table of contents

INVALIDQT function block...................................................153 Application.................................................................................154 Technical data...........................................................................155 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I...........................................156 Function block...........................................................................156 Functionality .............................................................................156 Operation principle ...................................................................156 Signals.......................................................................................156 Settings......................................................................................157 Monitored data...........................................................................157 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................157 Function block...........................................................................157 Functionality .............................................................................158 Operation principle ...................................................................158 Signals.......................................................................................158 Settings......................................................................................158 Additional arithmetic and logic functions........................................159 Additional arithmetic and logic functions...................................159 ADDI function block...................................................................159 Function block......................................................................159 Functionality.........................................................................159 Signals..................................................................................159 ADDR function block.................................................................160 Function block......................................................................160 Functionality.........................................................................160 Signals..................................................................................160 DIVI function block.....................................................................160 Function block......................................................................160 Functionality.........................................................................161 Signals..................................................................................161 DIVR function block...................................................................161 Function block......................................................................161 Functionality.........................................................................162 Signals..................................................................................162 MULI function block...................................................................162 Function block......................................................................162 Functionality.........................................................................162 Signals..................................................................................163 MULR function block.................................................................163 Function block......................................................................163 Functionality.........................................................................163 Signals..................................................................................163 SUBI function block...................................................................164
8 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Function block......................................................................164 Functionality.........................................................................164 Signals..................................................................................164 SUBR function block..................................................................165 Function block......................................................................165 Functionality.........................................................................165 Signals..................................................................................165 ITOR function block...................................................................165 Function block......................................................................165 Functionality.........................................................................166 Signals..................................................................................166 RTOI function block...................................................................166 Function block......................................................................166 Functionality.........................................................................166 Signals..................................................................................166 MINMAXR function block ..........................................................167 Function block......................................................................167 Functionality.........................................................................167 Signals..................................................................................167 SWITCHI function block............................................................168 Function block......................................................................168 Functionality.........................................................................168 Signals..................................................................................168 SWITCHR function block...........................................................169 Function block......................................................................169 Functionality.........................................................................169 Signals..................................................................................169 Factory settings restoration............................................................169 GATEWAY function block...............................................................170 SYSTEMTIME function block.........................................................170 WEBSERVER function block..........................................................170

Section 4

Protection functions......................................................171
Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC...................................171 Identification..............................................................................171 Function block...........................................................................171 Functionality..............................................................................171 Operation principle....................................................................171 Application.................................................................................173 Signals.......................................................................................173 Settings......................................................................................173 Measured values.......................................................................174 Monitored data...........................................................................174 Technical data...........................................................................174

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Section 5

Supervision functions...................................................175
Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT.........................................175 Identification..............................................................................175 Function block...........................................................................175 Functionality..............................................................................175 Operation principle ...................................................................175 Application.................................................................................177 Signals.......................................................................................177 Settings......................................................................................178 Measured values.......................................................................178 Monitored Data..........................................................................179 Technical data...........................................................................179

Section 6

Measurement functions................................................181
Three-phase current CMMXU........................................................181 Identification..............................................................................181 Function block...........................................................................181 Signals.......................................................................................181 Settings......................................................................................182 Monitored data...........................................................................183 Technical data...........................................................................184

Section 7

Power management functions......................................185

Load-shedding................................................................................185 Load-shedding principles and terminology.....................................186 Power flow sign conventions.....................................................188 Compensated circuit breaker status..........................................189 Load-shedding trigger................................................................190 Fast load-shedding trigger....................................................190 Slow load-shedding trigger...................................................190 Manual load-shedding trigger ..............................................191 Extended load-shedding trigger...........................................191 Load-shedding blocking.............................................................192 Power data holding and delay...................................................193 Load-shedding functions................................................................194 Power source circuit breaker function PSCSWI .......................194 Load busbar monitoring function LDMMXU...............................194 Network circuit breaker function NCBDCSWI............................194 Network power monitoring function NPMMXU..........................194 Contingency based load-shedding function LSCACLS ............195 Load-shedding trip command function LSPTRC.......................197 Subnetwork output function SNWRCLS ...................................197 Peer-to-peer load-shedding function PPLSGGIO .....................198

10

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Power-source circuit breaker PSCSWI...........................................198 Identification..............................................................................198 Function block...........................................................................199 Functionality..............................................................................199 Operation principle....................................................................200 Power monitoring.................................................................200 Block logic............................................................................202 Compensated CB status......................................................204 General logic........................................................................204 Fast load shed trigger logic..................................................206 Over current based load shed..............................................206 Demand based load shed....................................................208 Slow load shed logic.............................................................210 Binary to integer module......................................................212 Signals.......................................................................................214 Settings......................................................................................215 Measured values.......................................................................217 Monitored data...........................................................................218 Technical data...........................................................................219 Load busbar monitoring LDMMXU.................................................219 Identification..............................................................................219 Function block...........................................................................220 Functionality..............................................................................220 Operation principle....................................................................221 Power monitoring.................................................................221 Compensated CB status......................................................222 Load inhibit logic...................................................................222 Shed priority logic.................................................................223 Signals.......................................................................................224 Settings......................................................................................226 Measured values.......................................................................228 Monitored Data..........................................................................230 Network circuit breaker NCBDCSWI..............................................232 Identification..............................................................................232 Function block...........................................................................232 Functionality..............................................................................232 Operation principle....................................................................233 Power monitoring.................................................................233 Block logic............................................................................235 Compensated circuit breaker status.....................................238 FLS trigger logic...................................................................239 General Logic.......................................................................240 Binary to integer...................................................................242
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 11

Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................243 Settings......................................................................................244 Measured values.......................................................................244 Monitored data...........................................................................245 Network power monitoring NPMMXU.............................................245 Identification..............................................................................245 Function block...........................................................................246 Functionality..............................................................................246 Operation principle....................................................................246 Configuration check..............................................................248 Test request logic.................................................................248 Adjacent area LS data handle..............................................249 Source1/source2 LS data handle.........................................250 Power monitoring.................................................................252 General logic........................................................................252 Load-shed sharing mode......................................................254 Busbar logic..........................................................................255 Binary to integer...................................................................256 Signals.......................................................................................258 Settings......................................................................................259 Measured values.......................................................................259 Monitored data...........................................................................260 Contingency based load-shedding LSCACLS................................260 Identification..............................................................................260 Function block...........................................................................261 Functionality..............................................................................261 Operation principle....................................................................262 Network determination.........................................................263 LS blocking and trigger.........................................................265 Load busbar monitoring .......................................................270 Load generation balance......................................................270 Manual LS selection ............................................................273 Subnetwork priority calculation.............................................273 Peer load shed logic.............................................................277 General logic........................................................................278 Load busbar command.........................................................279 Signals.......................................................................................281 Settings......................................................................................283 Measured values.......................................................................284 Monitored data...........................................................................285 Load-shed trip command LSPTRC.................................................286 Identification..............................................................................286 Function block...........................................................................287
12 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Table of contents

Functionality..............................................................................287 Operation principle....................................................................287 General logic........................................................................288 Signals.......................................................................................288 Measured values.......................................................................289 Monitored data...........................................................................289 Output interface for subnetworks SNWRCLS.................................290 Identification..............................................................................290 Function block...........................................................................290 Functionality..............................................................................290 Operation principle....................................................................290 General logic........................................................................292 Signals.......................................................................................293 Monitored data...........................................................................294 Peer-to-peer load-shedding PPLSGGIO........................................295 Identification..............................................................................295 Function block...........................................................................296 Functionality..............................................................................296 Operation principle....................................................................296 General logic........................................................................297 Signals.......................................................................................298 Monitored data...........................................................................298

Section 8

Control functions..........................................................301
Position evaluation POS_EVAL......................................................301 Identification..............................................................................301 Function block...........................................................................301 Functionality .............................................................................301 Operation principle....................................................................301 Signals.......................................................................................302 Settings......................................................................................302

Section 9

General function block features....................................303

Definite time characteristics............................................................303 Definite time operation...............................................................303 Current-based inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristics.................................................................................308 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection.....................................308 Standard inverse-time characteristics..................................310 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics.................325 RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics........................325 Reset in inverse-time modes.....................................................328

Section 10 IED physical connections.............................................339

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 13

Table of contents

Protective earth connections..........................................................339 Inputs..............................................................................................340 Measuring inputs.......................................................................340 Auxiliary supply voltage input....................................................340 Binary inputs..............................................................................341 Outputs...........................................................................................341 IRF.............................................................................................341 Communication connections..........................................................342 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection................................................342 Ethernet connection for station communication.........................343 Optical serial rear connection....................................................343 Communication interfaces and protocols..................................343 Recommended third-party industrial Ethernet switches ...........343 Terminal diagrams..........................................................................344

Section 11 Technical data..............................................................345 Section 12 IED and functionality tests............................................349 Section 13 Applicable standards and regulations..........................353 Section 14 Glossary.......................................................................355

14

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 1 Introduction

Section 1

Introduction

1.1

This manual
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.2

Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service. The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

1.3
1.3.1

Product documentation
Product documentation set
The application engineering guide provides information for the complete configuration of the load-shedding application comprising Relion IEDs, RIO600, load-shedding controller IED and COM600 using PCM600, IET600 and SAB600. With a practical example, the document explains all the steps from system planning and engineering to application functionality and IED parameterization for realizing the load-shedding functionality using the IEDs. The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED with the load-shedding power management functions. The manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for checking external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a substation that is not in service. The chapters are organized in chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

15

Section 1 Introduction

1MRS757256 D

The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocol supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on vendor-specific implementations. The engineering manual contains instructions to engineer the IEDs for the loadshedding power management functionality using PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure and also recommends a sequence for engineering of the IEDs' LHMI functions and IEC 61850 communication engineering. The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in chronological order in which the IED should be installed. The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been commissioned. The manual provides instructions for monitoring, controlling and setting the IED. The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication protocol manual. The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. See the 630 series documentation for installation and commissioning manuals. The PML630 documentation set includes only application engineering guide, engineering manual, IEC 61850 communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 point list manual, operation manual and technical manual.

1.3.2

Document revision history

Document revision/date A/2011-05-04 B/2011-11-03 C/2012-03-29 D/2013-10-14 Product version 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 History First release Content updated to correspond to the product series version Content updated to correspond to the product series version Content updated to correspond to the product series version

Download the latest documents from the ABB Website http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

16

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 1 Introduction Related documentation

Name of the document Application Engineering Guide Engineering Manual IEC 61850 Communication Protocol Manual IEC 61850 Point List Manual Operation Manual Document ID 1MRS757394 1MRS757184 1MRS757260 1MRS757261 1MRS757183

1.3.3

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Website http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.4
1.4.1

Symbols and conventions

Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to use a certain function. Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

17

Section 1 Introduction 1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

1MRS757256 D

Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also contains definitions of important terms. Push-button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push-button icons. and . To navigate between the options, use HMI menu paths are presented in bold. Select Main menu/Settings. WHMI menu names are presented in bold. Click Information in the WHMI menu structure. LHMI messages are shown in Courier font. To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press . Parameter names are shown in italics. The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set an own signal name in PCM600. The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.

1.4.3

Functions, codes and symbols

Table 1:
Functionality Monitoring Generic measured values Single-point indication Sixteen single-point indication Event counter Measured value limit supervision Station battery supervision Power management (load-shedding) Critical circuit breaker Contingency based load-shedding core function Busbar-wise sheddable loads data Busbar-wise load feeders load-shedding command Power source Subnetwork supervision Table continues on next page NCBDCSWI LSCACLS LDMMXU LSPTRC PSCSWI SNWRCLS MVGGIO1) SPGGIO SP16GGIO1) CNTGGIO1) MVEXP1) SPVNZBAT1)

Functions included in the IED

IEC 61850

18

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 1 Introduction
Functionality Network power source Information exchange between peer PML630s Disturbance recorder functions Analog channels 1-10 (samples) Analog channel 11-20 (samples) Analog channel 21-30 (samples) Analog channel 31-40 (calc. val.) Binary channel 1-16 Binary channel 17-32 Binary channel 33-48 Binary channel 49-64 Disturbance recorder Control Position evaluate Double point indication Multipurpose analog protection POS_EVAL1) DPGGIO1) MAPGAPC1) A1RADR A2RADR A3RADR1) A4RADR1) B1RBDR B2RBDR B3RBDR B4RBDR1) DRRDRE IEC 61850 NPMMXU PPLSGGIO2)

1) The function is not used by default. However, it is kept enabled in the Application Configuration tool for instantiation in any additional logic other than features offered by the IED connectivity package. 2) The PPLSGGIO function block is instantiated only when the cPMS - LS Configuration B is selected in the configuration wizard of the IED.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

19

20

1MRS757256 D

Section 2 PML630 overview

Section 2

PML630 overview

2.1

Overview
PML630 is a Power Management IED that provides comprehensive load-shedding solution for the power network in an industrial plant. It protects the plant against blackouts and power source outages due to system disturbances. This IED is a member of ABB's Relion product family and a part of its 630 product series characterized by functional scalability and flexible configurability. PML630 is identical to the Relion 630 series IEDs and does not have any specific hardware modules. It is only the application functions pre-loaded in the IED that differentiate it from the other 630 series IEDs. The IED supports various modes of load-shedding. Fast load-shedding based on network contingencies Slow load-shedding based on transformer overloading or the maximum demand violation on the grid tie feeder Manual load-shedding based on operator-defined priorities or amount of loads to be shed in kW

PML630 complies to the IEC 61850 standard and offers seamless connectivity with other Relion 615/620/630 series IEDs, RIO600 IO units and COM600 to realize the load-shedding functionality. The IED uses GOOSE and MMS communication profiles for I/O data exchange with other Relion product family IEDs and COM600. The PML630 load-shedding controller essentially handles load-shedding functionality for plant electrical network. This comprises of various components. 6 generators 2 external network connectivity (tie line or grid transformers) and 6 busbars 15 network breakers 60 load-shedding groups (10 loads/load groups per busbar)

This is referred as cPMS - LS configuration A (for load-shedding power management function). All the six generators could also be configured as utility grid transformers. When the power network configuration exceeds the limits defined for a PML630 in Configuration A, an additional PML630 IED can be configured in a peer-to-peer method thereby dividing the network into sectors called power network areas. Each
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 21

Section 2 PML630 overview

1MRS757256 D

PML630 is responsible for the load-shedding action in its respective area, based on the power source capabilities and inter-power network area connectivity status. The coordination of load-shedding actions between the PML630 IEDs is handled by suitable parameterization. This arrangement of multiple PML630 IEDs in a peer-topeer method is called cPMS - LS configuration B. The PML630 IEDs communicate with each other also using IEC 61850 GOOSE. Likewise, cPMS - LS configuration B is also a feature in PML630. The Configuration B is always built up over and above the Configuration A and hence the latter is a prerequisite. The maximum recommended number of PML630 IEDs in a peer-to-peer mode in Configuration B is three. The power network areas would be connected to each other through their grid 1 or grid 2 power source connection points.

2.2

Product version history

Product version 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 Product history First release Maintenance release Maintenance release Support for Relion 620 series, RIO600 in the solution cluster Fast load-shedding: external trigger enabling, extending network capability with Configuration B Slow load-shedding: coverage of all 6 generators for current-based overload load-shedding, 2 grid transformers' currents can be directly monitored for overcurrent using 8 CT TRM card; provision for direct reduction of overload (in addition to power-balance calculations) Manual load-shedding: defining load-shedding by power value from LHMI/COM600, external trigger for all 4 subnetworks Underfrequency load-shedding using 630 series' Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC for underfrequency detection and activation through fast and slow load-shedding functions Manual load-shedding mode not affected when fast and slow loadshedding modes are blocked Provision for external inhibition of load feeders Adaptation for double-busbar configuration

2.3

PCM600 and IED connectivity package version

Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 Ver.2.5 or later ABB IED Connectivity Package PML630 Ver.1.2

22

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 2 PML630 overview

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation

2.4

Local HMI
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the IED. The LHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.

GUID-AC825CD8-7361-464F-98DC-35D81332D75F V4 EN

Figure 1:

LHMI

2.4.1

Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

23

Section 2 PML630 overview

1MRS757256 D

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

3
GUID-371FF8D7-5C0C-406E-B0CE-F512ADB53FF2 V5 EN

4
Display layout

Figure 2:
1 Path 2 Content 3 Status

4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

24

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 2 PML630 overview

GUID-ED0CC912-ED59-4270-A3B8-9818FFE300FD V5 EN

Figure 3:

Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.

GUID-A6E0ECB6-03ED-44FC-AD89-BCE6CB25E5DC V4 EN

Figure 4:

Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

25

Section 2 PML630 overview 2.4.2 LEDs

1MRS757256 D

The LHMI includes three indicators above the display: Ready, Start, and Trip. The load shed start (initiation of power balance calculation) and operate (initiation of loadshed commands) are mapped to LHMI Start and Trip LEDs respectively. There are also 15 matrix programmable alarm LEDs in front of the LHMI. Each LED indicates three states with the colors: green, yellow and red.

2.4.3

Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus. The push-buttons are used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help, make new settings and confirmations. The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons.

26

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 2 PML630 overview

3 18

19

20

21 7

22

8
GUID-CDE93DB6-914C-49B6-851D-B67152AD7C2B V2 EN

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Figure 5:
1...5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons and RJ-45 communication port
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Enter Disabled in PML630 Uplink LED Not in use Multipage Menu Clear Help Communication port

Function button Disabled in PML630 Disabled in PML630 Escape Left Down Up Right Key

2.5

Web HMI
The WHMI enables the user to access the IED via a web browser. The supported Web browser version is Internet Explorer 7.0 or later.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

27

Section 2 PML630 overview

1MRS757256 D

WHMI is disabled by default. To enable the WHMI, select Main menu/Configuration/HMI/Web HMI/Operation via the LHMI.

WHMI offers several functions. Alarm indications and event lists System supervision Parameter settings Measurement display Disturbance records

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

GUID-B8B68F5D-8FDA-4B80-8C55-8EFF7B49A66B V3 EN

Figure 6:

Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely. Locally by connecting the user's computer to the IED via the front communication port. Remotely over LAN/WAN.

Thus, the WHMI can be used remotely to set the IED parameters and also other Relion series IEDs from a central operation workplace in the substation or the plant network.

2.5.1

Command buttons
Command buttons can be used to edit parameters and control information via the WHMI.

28

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 2 PML630 overview

Table 2:
Name

Command buttons
Description Enabling parameter editing. Disabling parameter editing. Writing parameters to the IED. Refreshing parameter values. Committing changes to IED's nonvolatile flash memory. Rejecting changes. Triggering the disturbance recorder manually. Saving the disturbance recording. Freezing the values so that updates are not displayed. Receiving continuous updates to the monitoring view. Deleting the disturbance record.

2.6

Authorization
The user categories are predefined for the LHMI and WHMI, each with different rights. The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600. One user can belong to one or several user categories. At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser until users are created with PCM600. Logging on is not required for the LHMI.

Table 3:
Username SystemOperator

Predefined user categories

User rights Control from LHMI, no bypass All settings Application configuration User and password administration

ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

29

Section 2 PML630 overview

1MRS757256 D

All changes in user management settings will cause an IED reboot.

2.7

Communication
The IED supports IEC 61850-8-1 standard for communication. This includes MMS communication profile for vertical communication and GOOSE communication profile for horizontal communication. All operational information and controls are available through these profiles. The IED operator functionality is achieved through the MMS communication profile or through the WHMI client surface. The IED exchanges load-shedding operational signals using the IEC 61850 GOOSE profile from feeder IEDs (REF/REM/RET615, REF/REM/RET620, REF/ REG/REM/RET630 and Remote I/O Unit RIO600 1.2). The IED receives binary and analog signals from feeder IEDs for load-shedding input data processing. The data transfer from a generator or transformer IEDs (RET615, RET620, REG/ RET630 and Remote I/O Unit RIO600 1.2) to the IED includes circuit breaker status, trip or critical alarms, power and current (for transformer feeder IEDs). The data transfer from the load feeder IEDs (REF/REM/RET615, REF/REM/ RET620, REF/REM/RET630 and Remote I/O Unit RIO600 1.2) to the IED includes circuit breaker status and power.

The load-shedding information (binary signals) is sent to the load feeder IEDs using IEC 61850 GOOSE communication profile. The IED can also interoperate with other IEC 61850 compliant IEDs including Relion 630 and 615 series of IEDs and reports events to five different IEC 61850 clients (HMI/Gateways and so on) simultaneously using the MMS communication profile. All communication connectors, except for the front port connector are placed on integrated communication modules. The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a timestamping resolution of 1 ms. Ethernet based: SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)

With special time synchronization wiring: IRIG-B

30

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Section 3

Basic functions

3.1
3.1.1
3.1.1.1

User authentication
Authority check ATHCHCK
Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED and PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED. Local, through the LHMI Remote, through the communication ports

3.1.1.2

Operation principle
Different levels (or types) of users can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools' functionality.
Table 4:
User type SystemOperator ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator

Predefined user types

Access rights Control from LHMI, no bypass, protection function activation and deactivation All settings Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT) User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI on the IED. There are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on LHMI. Use only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 in user names and passwords.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

31

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Include at least one user in the UserAdministrator group to be able to write users created in PCM600 to the IED.

Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management. Once a user is created and written to the IED, the user can perform a Log on using the password assigned in the tool. The default user is Guest. If there is no user created, an attempt to log on displays a message box No user defined!. If one user leaves the IED without logging off, the IED returns to Guest state, in which only reading is possible, after the timeout (set in Main menu/Configuration/ HMI/LHMI/Display Timeout) elapses. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60 minutes. If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the IED, the Log on window opens if a user attempts a Log on by pressing the Key pushbutton or if the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected. See the operation manual for more information on the logon procedure. After a successful Log on, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder if, for example, a password protected setting needs to be changed. If the Log on has failed, an "Error Access Denied" message opens. If the user enters an incorrect password three times, the user is blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to log in can be performed. The user is blocked from logging in from the LHMI, WHMI and PCM600. However, other users are allowed to log in during this period.

3.1.1.3

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.1.2
3.1.2.1

Authority status ATHSTAT

Function block
ATHSTAT USRBLKED LOGGEDON IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN

Figure 7:

Function block

32

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Functionality
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user logon activity.

3.1.2.2

3.1.2.3

Operation principle
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization. The fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) The fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) is activated.

3.1.2.4

Signals
Table 5:
Name USRBLKED LOGGEDON

ATHSTAT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description At least one user is blocked by invalid password At least one user is logged on

3.1.2.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

33

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.2
3.2.1
3.2.1.1
Table 6:
Name DisplayTimeout ContrastLevel DefaultScreen

Local human-machine interface LHMI

Local HMI screen behaviour
Settings
SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 10 - 120 -100 - 100 Main menu Control Events Measurements Disturbance records Monitoring Latest on top Oldest on top Off On No Yes No Yes No Yes Unit Min % Step 10 10 Default 60 0 Main menu Description Local HMI display timeout Contrast level for display Default screen

EvListSrtOrder AutoIndicationDRP SubstIndSLD InterlockIndSLD BypassCommands

Latest on top Off No No No

Sort order of event list Automatic indication of disturbance report Substitute indication on single line diagram Interlock indication on single line diagram Enable bypass of commands

3.2.2
3.2.2.1

Local HMI signals

Function block
LHMICTRL CLRLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 8:

LHMICTRL function block

34

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Signals
Table 7:
Name CLRLEDS

3.2.2.2

LHMICTRL Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 8:
Name HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD

LHMICTRL Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Backlight of the LCD display is active Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

3.2.3
3.2.3.1

Basic part for the LED indication module

Function block
LEDGEN BLOCK RESET NEWIND ACK IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 9:

LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1 ^HM1L01R ^HM1L01Y ^HM1L01G

IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 10:

GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has a similar function block.

3.2.3.2

Functionality
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually using Signal Matrix or Application Configuration. Each LED is controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that controls the color and the operating mode.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

35

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Each indication LED on LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

3.2.3.3

Operation principle Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the display in the front of the IED: green, yellow and red. The green LED has a fixed function, while the yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is created (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

Indication LEDs
Operating modes Collecting mode LEDs which are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset From LHMI The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive-edge triggered, not level triggered. Acknowledge/reset via the Clear button and menus on the LHMI.

From function input The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, ACK_RST, to the function. This input can, for example, be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

36

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

positive-edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed. Automatic reset Only indications defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S)The can be automatically reset. When the LEDs have automatically been reset, still persisting indications are indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset. The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence diagrams.
= No indication
G=

= Steady light
Y=

= Flash
R=

Green

Yellow

Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 11:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

37

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Activating signal

LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 12:

Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in parallel is shown in Figure 13.
Activating signal GREEN Activating signal RED

LED

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 13:

Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 14:

Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

38

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

When a LED is acknowledged, all indications that appear before the indication with higher priority has been reset, are acknowledged, independent of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 15 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal is shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.
Activating signal GREEN Activating signal RED

LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 15:

Operating sequence 3, 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority acknowledges also low priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 16.
Activating signal GREEN Activating signal YELLOW Activating signal RED

LED

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 16:

Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority indication the high priority indication is shown as not acknowledged according to Figure 17.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

39

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal YELLOW Activating signal RED

LED

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 17:

Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated. Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication lights up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that the indications that are still activated are not affected by the reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset is executed, a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal

LED

Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 18:

Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED changes color according to Figure 19.

40

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Activating signal GREEN Activating signal RED

LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 19:

Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also, in this case indications that are still activated are not affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Figure 20 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Disturbance
tRestart

Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

IEC01000239 V2 EN

IEC01000239_2-en.vsd

Figure 20:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance

41

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Figure 21 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance tRestart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2 Disturbance tRestart

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 21:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

42

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Disturbance tRestart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 22:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance tRestart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 23:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

43

Section 3 Basic functions

3.2.3.4 Signals
Table 9:
Name BLOCK RESET

1MRS757256 D

LEDGEN Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input to block the operation of the LEDs Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 10:
Name HM1L01R HM1L01Y HM1L01G

GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

Table 11:
Name NEWIND ACK

LEDGEN Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description New indication signal if any LED indication input is set A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

3.2.3.5
Table 12:
Name Operation tRestart tMax

Settings
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Unit s s Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Description Operation Off/On Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance

44

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 13:
Name SequenceType

GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S 0 - 18 0 - 18 0 - 18 0 - 18 Unit Step Default Follow-S Description Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm group 1

LabelOff LabelRed LabelYellow LabelGreen

1 1 1 1

G1L01_OFF G1L01_RED G1L01_YELLOW G1L01_GREEN

Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1 is off Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1 is red Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1 is yellow Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1 is green

3.2.4
3.2.4.1

Display part for HMI function keys control module

Function block
^LEDCTL1
IEC09000327 V1 EN

FNKEYMD1 ^FKEYOUT1

Figure 24:

Function block

3.2.4.2

Functionality
LHMI has five function buttons, directly to the left of the display, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration. When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.

3.2.4.3

Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of the actual function block changes. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc. FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally set using the Parameter Setting tool.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

45

Section 3 Basic functions

Operating sequence

1MRS757256 D

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED. Mode 0 (OFF) This mode always gives the output the value 0 (FALSE). Changes on the IO attribute are ignored.
Input value

Output value
IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 25:

Sequence diagram for Mode 0

Mode 1 (TOGGLE) In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value

Output value
IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 26:

Sequence diagram for Mode 1

Mode 2 (PULSED) In this mode the output is high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time the output returns to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is no output pulse. Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

46

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Input value Output value

tpulse

tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd

IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 27:

Sequence diagram for Mode 2

Input function

All the inputs work in the same way. When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is of type CONTROL, the corresponding input on this function block becomes active, and lights up the yellow function button LED when high. This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off.

3.2.4.4

Signals
Table 14:
Name LEDCTL1

FNKEYMD1 Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description LED control input for function key

Table 15:
Name FKEYOUT1

FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output controlled by function key

3.2.4.5
Table 16:
Name Mode

Settings
FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off Toggle Pulsed 0.001 - 60.000 0 - 18 0 - 18 Unit Step Default Off Description Output operation mode

PulseTime LabelOn LabelOff

s -

0.001 1 1

0.200 LCD_FN1_ON LCD_FN1_OFF

Pulse time for output controlled by LCDFn1 Label for LED on state Label for LED off state

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

47

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 17:
Name Type

FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off Menu shortcut Control Main menu Control Events Measurements Disturbance records Monitoring Unit Step Default Off Description Function key type

MenuShortcut

Main menu

3.3
3.3.1

IED identifiers TERMINALID

Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country. Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

3.3.2
3.3.2.1

Application
Customer-specific settings
The customer-specific settings are used to give the IED a unique name and address. The settings are used by a central control system to communicate with the IED. The customer-specific identifiers are found in the LHMI or WHMI in Configuration/System. The settings can also be made from PCM600. Use only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 in station, unit and object names.

48

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Settings

TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 Unit Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 AA0J0Q0A0 Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number Technical key

3.3.3
Table 18:
Name StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber TechnicalKey

3.4
3.4.1

Product information
Functionality
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven presets, settings that are unchangeable but important. IEDProdType ProductDef FirmwareVer SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the LHMI or WHMI, under Information/Product identifiers. They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

3.4.2

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.5
3.5.1

Primary system values PRIMVAL

Functionality
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set in Main menu/ Configuration/System in the LHMI and PCM600.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

49

Section 3 Basic functions 3.5.2 Application

1MRS757256 D

The rated system frequency is set in Main menu/Configuration/System in the LHMI and PCM600.

3.5.3
Table 19:
Name Frequency PhaseRotation

Settings
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 50.0 - 60.0 Normal=L1L2L3 Inverse=L3L2L1 Unit Hz Step 10.0 Default 50.0 Normal=L1L2L3 Description Rated system frequency System phase rotation

3.6
3.6.1

Global phase base values BASEPH

Functionality
Almost all the current, voltage and power setting values are given in per unit (p.u.) values. The p.u. values are relational values to certain base values (given in A, kV, kVA). The base values are separate setting parameters for an IED. The base values are set independently of the used measurement device primary ratings. This allows for the settings to be given in relation to the nominal current and voltage values of the protected object, for example, if the measurement devices are oversized and their primary ratings are higher than the nominal values of the protected object. The phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase base values are defined in BASEPH. The global settings related to BASEPH are located in Configuration/Analog inputs/ Base values/Phase Grp 13 in LHMI and Configuration/Analog inputs/Base values/BASEPH :13 in PST. The BASEPH (Phase Grp) is called phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase base value group. There are three groups (instances) of BASEPH (Phase Grp). As a default, all the applicable functions in the IED are set to use the same group of the base values. However, in each applicable function there is a selection (Base value Sel phase advanced settings) where one of the three possible groups can be selected individually for the function in question. For example, all PHxPTOC functions use the first group Base value Sel phase = "Phase Grp 1" as a default but two other groups "Phase Grp 2" are "Phase Grp 3" are possible to select.

50

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Settings

BASEPH Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.01 - 440.00 1 - 6000 0.05 - 1800000.00 Unit kV A kVA Step 0.01 1 0.05 Default 20.00 400 13856.00 Description Voltage base value, phase-to-phase Current base value, phase Three-phase power base value

3.6.2
Table 20:
Name Voltage base Val PP Current base Val Ph S base value 3Ph

3.6.3

The principles for voltage settings given in pu

The voltage base value in BASEPH is the phase-to-phase voltage. This means that in voltage settings related to phase-to-phase voltage, 1.0 p.u. corresponds to 20.00 kV (assuming the default value for the Voltage base Val PP setting). An example of this kind of setting is DSTPDIS PP V Ph Sel GFC (the default value 0.8 pu corresponds to 0.8 x 20 kV = 16 kV ). For the voltage settings that are related to the phase-to-earth voltage, the functions contain internal scaling factor (0.5774). Therefore for the voltage settings related to the phase-to-earth voltage, 1.0 results in a nominal phase-to-earth voltage of 11.55 kV, assuming the default value 20.00 kV for the Voltage base Val PP setting. An example of this kind of setting is PSPTOV Start value (the default value 1.1 pu corresponds to 1.1 x 0.5774 x 20 kV 12.7 kV ). There are few functions for which the internal scaling is not done. In these functions it can be selected whether phase-to-phase voltages or phase-to-earth voltages are used, for example, the Voltage selection setting in PHPTOV. This also means that the voltage settings in these functions can be either related to the phaseto-phase voltage or to the phase-to-earth voltage depending on the selection. In functions, for example, PHPTOV, PHPTUV and SYNCRSYN, 1.0 p.u. corresponds to 20.00 kV, assuming the default value for the Voltage base Val PP setting regardless of the voltages used in the functions. If the Voltage selection setting in PHPTOV is set to phase-to-earth ("1"), a value of 0.64 p.u. for Start value results in 12.8 kV (1.1 x 11.55 kV)

3.7
3.7.1

Parameter setting group handling

Functionality
The different groups of settings are used to optimize the IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

51

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

either from the LHMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

3.7.2
3.7.2.1
Table 21:
Name ActiveSetGrp

Setting group handling SETGRPS

Settings
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 1-4 Unit Step Default SettingGroup1 Description ActiveSettingGroup

MaxNoSetGrp

Max number of setting groups 1-4

3.7.3
3.7.3.1

Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP

Function block
ACTVGRP ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 SETCHGD IEC09000064_en_1.vsd
IEC09000064 V1 EN

Figure 28:

Function block

3.7.3.2

Signals
Table 22:
Name ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4

ACTVGRP Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 Description Selects setting group 1 as active Selects setting group 2 as active Selects setting group 3 as active Selects setting group 4 as active

Table 23:
Name GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 SETCHGD 52

ACTVGRP Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Pulse when setting changed PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.7.3.3

3.7.4

Operation principle
Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Five functional output signals are available for configuration purposes. A setting group is selected by using the LHMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ACTVGRP function block. Each input of the function block can be configured with PCM600 to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if, for example, both group four and group two are set to activate, group two is the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

53

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

ACTIVATE GROUP 4 ACTIVATE GROUP 3 ACTIVATE GROUP 2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1 IOx-Bly1 IOx-Bly2 IOx-Bly3 IOx-Bly4 ACTVGRP ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 SETCHGD

IEC09000063_en_1.vsd
IEC09000063 V1 EN

Figure 29:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes five output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active.

3.7.5

Application
Four sets of settings are available to optimize the IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the LHMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios. Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the conditions in the power system. Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pretested settings in advance for different protection functions. Four different groups of setting parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different programmable binary inputs by external or internal control signals.

54

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

3.8
3.8.1

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is used by the respective functions in Application Configuration, for example, protection, measurement or monitoring. The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix or the Application Configuration tools.

3.8.2
3.8.2.1

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_1

Function block
SMAI_20_1 BLOCK DFTSPFC REVROT ^GRP1L1 ^GRP1L2 ^GRP1L3 ^GRP1N SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN IEC09000137-1-en.vsd
IEC09000137 V1 EN

Figure 30:

SMAI_20_1 function block

3.8.2.2

Signals
Table 24:
Name BLOCK DFTSPFC REVROT GRP1L1 GRP1L2 GRP1L3 GRP1N

SMAI_20_1 Input signals

Type BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN STRING STRING STRING STRING Default 0 20.0 0 Description Block group 1 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Reverse rotation group 1 First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

55

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 25:
Name SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

SMAI_20_1 Output signals

Type REAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Description Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4 Quantity connected to the first analog input Quantity connected to the second analog input Quantity connected to the third analog input Quantity connected to the fourth analog input Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

3.8.2.3

Settings
Only values 1-3 of the parameter GlobalBaseSel should normally be used. The values 1-3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp 3 correspondingly (BASEPH1, BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the actual limit for frequency calculation set by MinValFreqMeas which by default is 10% of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group. The values 4-6 refer to Residual Grp 1, Residual Grp 2 and Residual Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600) correspondingly and they are typically not to be used in this connection.

56

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 26:
Name GlobalBaseSel DFTRefExtOut

SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1-6 InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph Voltage Current Unit Step 1 Default 1 InternalDFTRef Description Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType AnalogInputType

Ph-N Voltage

Input connection type Analog input signal type

Table 27:
Name Negation

SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Unit Step Default Off Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas

10

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the minimum amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect only if the current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference for the adaptive DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting guidelines.
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 57

Section 3 Basic functions 3.8.3 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_2
SMAI_20_2 BLOCK REVROT ^GRP2L1 ^GRP2L2 ^GRP2L3 ^GRP2N AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN IEC09000138-2-en.vsd
IEC09000138 V2 EN

1MRS757256 D

Figure 31:

SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 function block

Note that input and output signals on SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 are the same except for input signals GRPxL1 to GRPxN where x is equal to instance number (2 to 12).

3.8.3.1

Signals
Table 28:
Name BLOCK REVROT GRP2L1 GRP2L2 GRP2L3 GRP2N

SMAI_20_2 Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN STRING STRING STRING STRING Default 0 0 Description Block group 2 Reverse rotation group 2 First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

Table 29:
Name AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

SMAI_20_2 Output signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Description Grouped three phase signal containing data from inputs 1-4 Quantity connected to the first analog input Quantity connected to the second analog input Quantity connected to the third analog input Quantity connected to the fourth analog input Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

58

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings
Only values 1-3 of the parameter GlobalBaseSel should normally be used. The values 1-3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp 3 correspondingly (BASEPH1, BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the actual limit for frequency calculation set by MinValFreqMeas which by default is 10% of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group. The values 4-6 refer to Residual Grp 1, Residual Grp 2 and Residual Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600) correspondingly and they are typically not to be used in this connection.

3.8.3.2

Table 30:
Name GlobalBaseSel DFTReference

SMAI_20_2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 1-6 InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph Voltage Current Unit Step 1 Default 1 InternalDFTRef Description Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups DFT reference

ConnectionType AnalogInputType

Ph-N Voltage

Input connection type Analog input signal type

Table 31:
Name Negation

SMAI_20_2 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Unit Step Default Off Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas

10

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the minimum amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 59

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

practical affect only if the current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference for the adaptive DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

3.8.4

Application
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency, harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is used by the respective functions in Application Configuration, for example, protection, measurement or monitoring. The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix or the Application Configuration tools.

3.8.5

Operation principle
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see Figure 30 and Figure 31. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset all outputs to 0. The output signals AI1 to AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the, in SMT or ACT, connected input group signals to GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GRPxN is always the neutral current. If GRPxN is not connected, the AI4 output is all zero. The AIN output is the calculated residual sum of inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 and is equal to output AI4 if all inputs, including GRPxN, are connected. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT or ACT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P. Value group 1 to 3 for setting GlobalBaseSel refers to phase and phase-to-phase global base value function instances. Value group 4 to 6 refer to residual global base value function instances and are not intended for most applications. More detailed explanation of some of the settings and example of using frequency adaptive DFT. DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid for function block SMAI_20_1:1, SMAI_20_1:2 and SMAI_80_1 only. Reference block for external output (SPFCOUT function output). DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block.

60

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

These DFT reference block settings decide DFT reference for DFT calculations (InternalDFTRef will use fixed DFT reference based on set system frequency. DFTRefGrpn will use DFT reference from the selected group block, when own group selected adaptive DFT reference will be used based on calculated signal frequency from own group.ExternalDFTRef will use reference based on input DFTSPFC. MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated, expressed as percent of Voltage base Val PP (of the selected BASEPH group). Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. If, however, it is necessary to use frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other than default, refering current measuring SMAI) when no voltages are available, one must note that the MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference to Voltage base Val PP (of the selected BASEPH group). This means that the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the resulting minimum amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. Example of adaptive frequency tracking

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

61

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Task time group 1 SMAI instance 3 phase group 1 SMAI_20_1:1 2 SMAI_20_2:1 SMAI_20_3:1 3 4 SMAI_20_4:1 5 SMAI_20_5:1 6 SMAI_20_6:1 7 SMAI_20_7:1 8 SMAI_20_8:1 9 SMAI_20_9:1 10 SMAI_20_10:1 SMAI_20_11:1 11 12 SMAI_20_12:1 Task time group 2 SMAI instance 3 phase group 1 SMAI_20_1:2 SMAI_20_2:2 2 SMAI_20_3:2 3 SMAI_20_4:2 4 SMAI_20_5:2 5 SMAI_20_6:2 6 SMAI_20_7:2 7 8 SMAI_20_8:2 SMAI_20_9:2 9 SMAI_20_10:2 10 11 SMAI_20_11:2 SMAI_20_12:2 12
IEC09000029_1_en.vsd
IEC09000029 V1 EN

DFTRefGrp7

Figure 32:

SMAI instances as organized in different task time groups and the corresponding parameter numbers

The example shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the actual application. Example 1
SMAI_20_7:1 BLOCK SPFCOUT DFTSPFC AI3P REVROT AI1 ^GRP1L1 AI2 ^GRP1L2 AI3 ^GRP1L3 AI4 ^GRP1N AIN SMAI_20_1-12:2 BLOCK SPFCOUT DFTSPFC AI3P REVROT AI1 ^GRP1L1 AI2 ^GRP1L2 AI3 ^GRP1L3 AI4 ^GRP1N AIN

IEC09000028-2-en.vsd
IEC09000028 V2 EN

Figure 33:

Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

62

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Assume instance SMAI_20_7:1 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to control the frequency tracking (For the SMAI_20_x task time groups). Observe that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type. For task time group 1 this gives the following settings: SMAI_20_7:1: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp7 to route SMAI_20_7:1 reference to the SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI_20_7:1 to use SMAI_20_7:1 as reference. SMAI_20_2:1 - SMAI_20_12:1 DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI_20_2:1 SMAI_20_12:1 to use SMAI_20_7:1 as reference. For task time group 2 this gives the following settings: SMAI_20_1:2 - SMAI_20_12:2 DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference (SMAI_20_7:1)

3.9
3.9.1

Measured value expander block MVEXP

Function block
MVEXP RANGE* HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN

Figure 34:

Function block

3.9.2

Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CMMXU, RESCMMXU, RESVMMXU, VPHMMXU, VPPMMXU and PWRMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CSMSQI and VSMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block has been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to five binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

63

Section 3 Basic functions 3.9.3 Operation principle

1MRS757256 D

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block (CMMXU, RESCMMXU, RESVMMXU, VPHMMXU, VPPMMXU, PWRMMXU, CSMSQI, VSMSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals.
Table 32:
Output

Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised value below low-low between low limit low and low limit High High High High High between low and high limit between high- above highhigh and high high limit limit

LOWLOW LOW NORMAL HIGH HIGHHIGH

3.9.4

Application
The current and voltage measurement functions (CMMXU, RESCMMXU, RESVMMXU, VPHMMXU, VPPMMXU and PWRMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CSMSQI and VSMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (MVEXP) has been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to five binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

3.9.5

Signals
Table 33:
Name RANGE

MVEXP Input signals

Type INTEGER Default 0 Description Measured value range

Table 34:
Name HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW 64

MVEXP Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Measured value is above high-high limit Measured value is between high and high-high limit Measured value is between high and low limit Measured value is between low and low-low limit Measured value is below low-low limit PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.9.6

3.10
3.10.1

Fixed signals FXDSIGN

Function block
FXDSIGN OFF ON INTZERO INTONE INTALONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF

IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN

Figure 35:

Function block

3.10.2

Functionality
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.

3.10.3

Operation principle
The FXDSIGN function block has nine outputs. OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0 INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1 INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex) REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

65

Section 3 Basic functions 3.10.4 Application

1MRS757256 D

The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.

3.10.5

Signals
Table 35:
Name OFF ON INTZERO INTONE INTALONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF

FXDSIGN Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER REAL STRING GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Description Boolean signal fixed off Boolean signal fixed on Integer signal fixed zero Integer signal fixed one Integer signal fixed all ones Real signal fixed zero String signal with no characters Channel id for zero sample Group signal fixed off

3.10.6

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.11
3.11.1

Event counter CNTGGIO

Function block

GUID-70FE6C09-DC4B-4B1B-B9B4-63C7115F752D V1 EN

Figure 36:

Function block

3.11.2

Functionality
The event counter function CNTGGIO consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter has been activated. It is also provided

66

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

with a common blocking function for all six counters to be used, for example, at testing. Each counter can be set to "On" or "Off" separately with a parameter setting.

3.11.3

Operation principle
The event counter function has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters is increased by one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count-up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10000. The counter stops at 10000 and no restart takes places, even if the count exceeds 10000. A mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product to avoid the risk of the flash memory becoming worn out due to too many writings. As a result, it can take a long time, up to one hour, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. If a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it is lost. The CNTGGIO-stored values in the flash memory are, however, not lost at an auxiliary power interruption. The function block also has an input BLOCK. The activation of the BLOCK input blocks all six counters. The inputs can be used for blocking the counters at testing, for example. All inputs are configured via PCM600.

3.11.3.1

Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the LHMI. Reset of counters can be performed in the LHMI and with a binary input. Reading of the content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely with PCM600 or, for example, MicroSCADA.

3.11.4

Technical data
Table 36:
Function Counter value Maximum count up speed

CNTGGIO Technical data

Range or value 0-10000 10 pulses/second Accuracy -

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

67

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.12
3.12.1

Test mode functionality TESTMODE

Function block
TESTMODE INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN

Figure 37:

Function block

3.12.2

Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the protection functions in the IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock every function(s) individually from the LHMI to perform the required tests. When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED remains in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing is done with the actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings are changed to avoid mistakes.

3.12.3

Operation principle
IED functions can be tested in test mode. The IED can be set to test mode either by activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE, or setting TestMode to On in the LHMI. When the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the Test mode: On state, that is, input from configuration (OUTPUT output is activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output is activated). When the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED flashes and all functions are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode. Most of the IED functions can individually be blocked by local HMI settings. To enable blockings, the IED must be in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated). When leaving the test mode and entering the normal mode, the blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing is done with actually

68

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

set and configured values within the IED. No settings are changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions are still blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings are not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all the output signals from the actual function, so no outputs are activated. When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED re-enters test mode and all functions are blocked, also the functions that were unblocked before the change. During the reentering to test mode, all functions are temporarily unblocked for a short time, which may lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by LHMI. The TESTMODE function block can be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block. Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block. The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a maintenance test.

3.12.4

Application
The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature that allows individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions. This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct functionality and to check parts of the configuration, and so on.

3.12.5

Signals
Table 37:
Name INPUT

TESTMODE Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Sets terminal in test mode when active

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

69

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 38:
Name ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT

TESTMODE Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Terminal in test mode when active Test input is active Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off) Event disabled during testmode

3.12.6
Table 39:
Name TestMode EventDisable CmdTestBit

Settings
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Off On Off On Unit Step Default Off Off Off Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode

3.13
3.13.1
3.13.1.1

Disturbance record DRRDRE

Disturbance report DRRDRE
Function block
DRRDRE DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED IEC09000347-1-en.vsd
IEC09000347 V1 EN

Figure 38:

Function block

3.13.1.2

Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality. Disturbance report DRRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a maximum of 40 analog and 64 binary signals.

70

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions. Event list Indications Event recorder Trip value recorder Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity. A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AxRADR or BxRBDR function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time are included in the recording. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ringbuffer. The LHMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

3.13.1.3

Operation principle
Disturbance report DRRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system. Event list Indications Event recorder Trip value recorder Disturbance recorder

Figure 39 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. Event list, Event recorder and Indications uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

71

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

A1-4RADR

Disturbance Report

A4RADR Analog signals

RDRE Trip Value Rec

B1-4RBDR

Disturbance Recorder

Binary signals

B4RBDR Event List Event Recorder Indications

IEC09000136_en_1.vsd
IEC09000136 V1 EN

Figure 39:

Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report gets an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report

Record no. N

Record no. N+1

Record no. N+100

General dist. information

Indications

Trip values

Event recordings

Disturbance recording

Event list

en05000161.vsd
IEC05000161 V1 EN

Figure 40:

Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100 where the maximum recording time is
72 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list, Event recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder). The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total recording time. Long recording time reduces the number of recordings to less than 100.

Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the LHMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report, use a PC and either the PCM600 Disturbance Handling tool or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to IED front port, or remotely via a station bus.

Indications

Indications is a list of signals that are activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged). See the section about indications for detailed information.

Event recorder

The event recorder can contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events which have occurred during a disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM600. See the event recorder section for detailed information.

Event list

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when the selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals can be presented via LHMI, WHMI or PCM600. See the event list section for detailed information.

Trip value recorder

The recorded trip values include the phasors of the selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault. See the trip value recorder section for detailed information.

Disturbance recorder

The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. See the disturbance recorder section for detailed information.

Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times

Disturbance report DRRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

73

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Disturbance recorder, event recorder and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =

Pre-trigger time + tFault + Post-trigger time or Pre-trigger time + Recording time limit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

Trig point Recording time limit Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time

3
IEC09000708-1-en.vsd

IEC09000708 V1 EN

Figure 41:
Pre-trigger time, 1 tFault, 2

Recording times definition

Pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting Pre-trigger time to set this time. Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by Recording time limit the limit time). Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting Post-trigger time to set this time. Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting Recording time limit to set this time.

Post-trigger time, 3 Recording time limit

Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the disturbance recorder and triggering of the disturbance report function. Of those signals, 20 are reserved for external analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI). The last 20 channels can be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

74

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

SMAI GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

A1RADR A2RADR GRPINPUT1 GRPINPUT2 GRPINPUT3 GRPINPUT4 GRPINPUT5 GRPINPUT6 ... A3RADR INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 A4RADR

External analog signals

Internal analog signals

INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 ... INPUT30

GUID-ECD1F42C-23E5-4B0A-953A-CC6D9FDA1C27 V1 EN

Figure 42:

Analog input function blocks

The external input signals are acquired, filtered and skewed, and after configuration available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The information is saved at the disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, th disturbance recorder uses the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available. Application Configuration tool is used for analog configuration of the disturbance report. The SMAI function block calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AINoutput). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly. For each of the analog signals, Operation Ch = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation Ch, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals. If Operation Ch = Off, no waveform (samples) are recorded and reported in graph. However, the trip value, pre-fault and fault value are recorded and reported. The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 75

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

If Operation Ch = On, waveform (samples) is recorded and reported in graph. The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals

Up to 64 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded in two occasions. Corresponding function block is included in the configuration Signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 64 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation Ch = Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow (START) and red (TRIP) LED on the LHMI: Set LED = Off/Start/Trip/Start and Trip. The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 64 signals with LHMI: Show indication=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. It is important to choose the right signals as trigger conditions. There are three different trigger types. Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the LHMI, WHMI, PCM600 or via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Binary signal trigger Any binary signal state, that is, logic one or a logic zero, can be selected to generate a trigger ( Trigger level = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal is not listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

76

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Analog signal trigger All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, whether they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are Over trigger Ch, Under trigger Ch, Over Trg Lev Ch and Under Trg Lev Ch. The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network. All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600.

Post retrigger

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a recording, after all the signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line. In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (Postretrig = On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording starts and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording. When the retrig parameter is disabled (Post-retrig = Off), a new recording does not start until the post-fault (Post-trigger time or Recording time limit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording, a new complete recording is started. Disturbance report function can handle at maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

3.13.1.4

Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/ or in the secondary system, it is important to gather information on fault currents, voltages and events. It is also important to have a continuous event-logging to enable monitoring in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the disturbance report function DRRDRE. The function provides a better understanding of the power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

77

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

The analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, in changing IED setting plan, to improve existing equipment, and so on. This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations, that is, a disturbance recording can be a part of functional analysis. Disturbance report DRRDRE is always included in the IED. It acquires sampled data of all the selected analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks. Maximum 20 external analog signals 20 internal derived analog signals 64 binary signals

Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions, such as indications, event recorder, event list, trip value recorder and disturbance recorder. Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are concerned. Thus, disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can record disturbances that are not discovered by protective functions. Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance recorder. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. LHMI can be used to get information about the recordings, and the disturbance report files can be uploaded in the PCM600 using the disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis (using WaveWin, that can be found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also upload disturbance report files using MMS (over IEC 61850-8-1) clients. If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder (record made and fault number) and the fault locator information are available as GOOSE or report control data. The analog output data from the load shedding function block for example, sheddable load, load mismatch and so on, is connected to the A4ARDR function block for recording the changes in the output data during a specified time period. This recording is initaiated by a binary trigger connected to one of the BxRBDR components. A pre-trigger time (max value = 3 s) and a post-trigger time (max value = 10 s) can be configured and the changes during the configured period of time is recorded. These changes can be viewed using the Disturbance Recording Viewing tool. Apart from generating the disturbance records , BxRBDR can be used for creating process events and for configuring the start and trip LED on the LHMI overlay. Binary output from the load shedding function block can be connected to the BxRBDR block to generate the process events. Presently the disturbance recorder does not support calculated analog values or sample values from an application thread that has a SMAI function configured for 80 samples/cycle.

78

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Signals
Table 40:
Name DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED

3.13.1.5

DRRDRE Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Disturbance report function turned off Disturbance recording started Disturbance recording made All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared More than 80% of memory used

3.13.1.6
Table 41:
Name Operation Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time Recording time limit Post-retrig Max Num records Reference channel Operation mode test

Settings
DRRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 0.05 - 3.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.5 - 8.0 Off On 10 - 100 1 - 30 Off On Unit s s s Ch Step 0.01 0.1 0.1 1 1 Default Off 0.10 0.5 1.0 Off 100 1 Off Description Operation Off/On Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Maximum number of stored disturbances Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel Operation mode during test mode

3.13.1.7

Monitored data
Table 42:
Name DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED

DRRDRE Monitored data

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit Description Disturbance report function turned off Disturbance recording started Disturbance recording made All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared More than 80% of memory used Memory usage (0-100%) Disturbance fault number

MEMUSED Memory used Fault number

BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER

% -

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

79

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 43:
Name

DRRDRE Monitored data channels

Type BOOLEAN Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit Description Under level trig for analog channel 1 activated Over level trig for analog channel 1 activated

Under Lev Trg Ch 1

Over Lev Trg Ch 1

BOOLEAN

Monitored data values are the same for each channel. The channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

3.13.2
3.13.2.1

Analog input signals A1RADR and A2RADR

Function block
A1RADR ^GRPINPUT1 ^GRPINPUT2 ^GRPINPUT3 ^GRPINPUT4 ^GRPINPUT5 ^GRPINPUT6 ^GRPINPUT7 ^GRPINPUT8 ^GRPINPUT9 ^GRPINPUT10 IEC09000349-1-en.vsd
IEC09000349 V1 EN

Figure 43:

Function block, analog inputs

3.13.2.2

Signals
The input signal tables for A1RADR and A2RADR are similar except for the GRPINPUT number. A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10 A2RADR, GRPINPUT11 - GRPINPUT20
A1RADR input signals
Type GROUP SIGNAL Default Description Group signal for input 1

Table 44:
Name GRPINPUT1

Values are the same for each input signal. The channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

80

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings
Setting tables for A1RADR and A2RADR are similar except for channel numbers. A1RADR, channel01 - channel10 A2RADR, channel11 - channel20

3.13.2.3

Table 45:
Name Operation Ch 1

A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation On/Off

Table 46:
Name

A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On Unit Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Off Description Nominal value for analog channel 1 Use under level trigger for analog channel 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of signal Use over level trigger for analog channel 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of signal

Nominal value Ch 1 Under trigger Ch 1

Under Trg Lev Ch 1

0 - 200

50

Over trigger Ch 1

Off On

Off

Over Trg Lev Ch 1

0 - 5000

200

IEC60870-5-103 Function type Ch 1 0 - 255 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1 (IEC60870-5-103) Information number for analog channel 1 (IEC60870-5-103)

Information Num Ch 1

0 - 255

Settings are the same for each channel. The channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

81

Section 3 Basic functions 3.13.3

3.13.3.1

1MRS757256 D

Analog input signals A3RADR and A4RADR

Function block

GUID-88FD658F-1A11-4704-B152-F9E0C16C873B V1 EN

Figure 44:

A3RADR function block, derived analog inputs

3.13.3.2

Signals
Input signal tables for A3RADR and A4RADR are similar except for the GRPINPUT number. A3RADR, INPUT21 - INPUT30 A4RADR, INPUT31 - INPUT40
A3RADR input signals
Type REAL Default 0 Description Analog channel 21

Table 47:
Name INPUT21

3.13.3.3

Settings
Setting tables for A3RADR and A4RADR are similar except for the channel numbers. A3RADR, channel 21 - channel 30 A4RADR, channel 31 - channel 40

Table 48:
Name Operation Ch 21

A3RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation On/Off

82

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 49:
Name

A3RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On Unit Step 0.1 Default 0.0 Off Description Nominal value for analog channel 21 Use under level trigger for analog channel 21 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analog channel 21 in % of signal Use over level trigger for analog channel 21 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analog channel 21 in % of signal

Nominal value Ch 21 Under trigger Ch 21

Under Trg Lev Ch 21

0 - 200

50

Over trigger Ch 21

Off On

Off

Over Trg Lev Ch 21

0 - 5000

200

IEC60870-5-103 Function type Ch 21 0 - 255 1 0 Function type for analog channel 21 (IEC60870-5-103) Information number for analog channel 21 (IEC60870-5-103)

Information Num Ch 21

0 - 255

3.13.4
3.13.4.1

Binary input signals BxRBDR

Function block
B1RBDR ^INPUT1 ^INPUT2 ^INPUT3 ^INPUT4 ^INPUT5 ^INPUT6 ^INPUT7 ^INPUT8 ^INPUT9 ^INPUT10 ^INPUT11 ^INPUT12 ^INPUT13 ^INPUT14 ^INPUT15 ^INPUT16 IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN

Figure 45:

Function block, binary inputs

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

83

Section 3 Basic functions

3.13.4.2 Signals

1MRS757256 D

Input signal tables for B1RBDR - B4RBDR are all similar except for the INPUT number. B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16 B2RBDR, INPUT17 - INPUT32 B3RBDR, INPUT33 - INPUT48 B4RBDR, INPUT49 - INPUT64
B1RBDR input signals
Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Binary channel 1

Table 50:
Name INPUT1

Input settings are the same for each channel. The channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

3.13.4.3

Settings
Setting tables for B1RBDR - B4RBDR are all similar except for the binary channel numbers. B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16 B2RBDR, channel17 - channel32 B3RBDR, channel33 - channel48 B4RBDR, channel49 - channel64

Table 51:
Name

B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Off Start Trip Start and Trip Unit Step Default Off Off Description Trigger operation On/Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1

Trigger operation 1 Set LED 1

84

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 52:
Name Trigger level 1

B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Unit Step Default Trig on 1 Description Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for binary input 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1

Show indication 1 IEC60870-5-103 Function type Ch 1

Hide Show

Hide

0 - 255

Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC60870-5-103)

Information Num Ch 1

0 - 255

Settings are the same for each channel. The channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

3.13.5

Technical data
Table 53:
Function Pre-fault time Post-fault time Limit time Maximum number of recordings Time tagging resolution Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording Maximum number of events in the Event list Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value) Sampling rate Recording bandwidth

DRRDRE technical data

Range or value (0.053.00) s (0.110.0) s (0.58.0) s 100, first in - first out 1 ms 20 + 20 (external + internally derived) 64 30 64 150 1000, first in - first out 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz (5-300) Hz Accuracy See time synchronization technical data -

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

85

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.14
3.14.1

Self supervision with internal event list

Functionality
The Self supervision with internal event list (INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST) function reacts to internal system events generated by the different built-in selfsupervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

3.14.2
3.14.2.1

Internal error signals INTERRSIG

Function block
INTERRSIG FAIL WARNING TSYNCERR RTCERR STUPBLK IEC09000334-2-en.vsd
IEC09000334 V2 EN

Figure 46:

Function block

3.14.2.2

Signals
Table 54:
Name FAIL WARNING TSYNCERR RTCERR STUPBLK

INTERRSIG Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Internal fail Internal warning Time synchronization error Real time clock error Application startup block

3.14.2.3

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.14.3
3.14.3.1

Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

86

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously. Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

3.14.4

The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the LHMI, from the Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the LHMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Monitoring/Internal Events or Monitoring/IED Status. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This output relay is activated (no fault) and deactivated (fault) by the Internal Fail signal, see Figure 47. Also the software watchdog timeout and the undervoltage detection of the PSM deactivates the relay.
Power supply fault Power supply module I/O nodes

Fault

Watchdog TX overflow Master resp. Supply fault ReBoot I/O

Fault
AND INTERNAL FAIL

Internal Fail (CPU)

CEM

Fault

I/O nodes = BIO xxxx = Inverted signal

IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN

Figure 47:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

87

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

LIODEV FAIL LIODEV STOPPED LIODEV STARTED

>1 S R
e.g. BIO1- ERROR

>1
WDOG STARVED RTE FATAL ERROR FTF FATAL ERROR

SW Watchdog Error Runtime Exec Error File System Error

>1 >1

Internal Fail

RTE APP FAILED RTE ALL APPS OK GENTS RTC ERROR GENTS RTC OK

S R

Runtime App Error

S R

Real Time Clock Error

IEC 61850 NOT READY IEC 61850 READY DNP 3 STARTUP ERROR DNP 3 READY

S R S R

IEC 61850 Error DNP 3 Error

>1 Internal Warning

GENTS SYNC ERROR GENTS TIME RESET GENTS SYNC OK

>1

S R

Time Synch Error

CHANGE LOCK ON CHANGE LOCK OFF SETTINGS CHANGED

S R

Change lock Setting groups changed Settings changed

SETTINGS CHANGED

IEC09000381-2-en.vsd
IEC09000381 V2 EN

Figure 48:

Self supervision, function block internal signals

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in Signal Matrix. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block INTERSIG.

3.14.4.1

Internal signals
SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the

88

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 55. Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware configuration, see Table 56.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 57.

Table 55:
Name of signal Internal Fail Internal Warning Real Time Clock Error Time Synch Error Runtime App Error Runtime Exec Error IEC61850 Error SW Watchdog Error Setting(s) Changed Setting Group(s) Changed Change Lock File System Error

SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals

Description Internal fail status Internal warning status Real time clock status Time synchronization status Runtime application error status Runtime execution error status IEC 61850 error status SW watchdog error status Setting(s) changed Setting group(s) changed Change lock status Fault tolerant file system status

Table 56:
Card PSM TRM COM BIO AIM RTD

Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Name of signal PSM-Error TRM-Error COM-Error BIO-Error AIM-Error RTD-Error Description Power supply module error status Transformator module error status Communication module error status Binary input/output module error status Analog input module error status Resistance temperature detector / mA-output module error status

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

89

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 57:
Name of signal Internal Fail

Explanations of internal signals

Reasons for activation This signal is active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime App Error, Runtime Exec Error, SW Watchdog Error, File System Error This signal is active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error This signal is active if there is a hardware error with the real time clock. This signal is active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset. This signal is active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads. This signal is active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, for example. This signal is activated when the IED has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements. This signal is active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example. This signal generates an internal event to the internal event list if any setting(s) is changed. This signal generates an internal event to the Internal Event List if any setting group(s) is changed. This signal generates an internal Event to the Internal Event List if the Change Lock status is changed This signal is active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and cannot be recovered.

Internal Warning Real Time Clock Error Time Synch Error

Runtime Exec Error

IEC61850 Error

SW Watchdog Error

Runtime App Error

Setting(s) Changed Setting Group(s) Changed Change Lock File System Error

3.14.4.2

Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 49.

90

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

ADx ADx_Low
x1 u1 x2

ADx_High
x1 u1 x2

ADx Controller

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 49:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects. First is the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals is sent to the CPU, that is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher ADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU is informed and an alarm is given for A/D converter failure. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

3.14.5

Application
The protection and control IEDs have many functions included. Self supervision with internal event list (SELFSUPEVLST) and internal error signals (INTERRSIG) function provides supervision of the IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze and locate a fault. Both hardware and software supervision is included and possible faults can be indicated through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through the software communication.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

91

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure, a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated. Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated when the status changes for the built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order) or external time synchronization (in operation/out of order). Events are also generated whenever any setting in the IED is changed. The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list can be cleared via the LHMI. The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during commissioning and fault tracing. The list of internal events can be found in the LHMI, WHMI or PCM600. The list can be cleared via the LHMI or WHMI menu Clear/Clear internal event list.

3.14.6

Technical data
Table 58:
Data Recording manner List size

Self supervision with internal event list

Value Continuous, event controlled

3.15
3.15.1

Time synchronization
Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system. Do not use the MicroSCADA OPC server as a time synchronization source.

92

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

Settings
TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off SNTP Off SNTP IRIG-B Off SNTP-Server Unit Step Default Off Off Description Coarse time synchronization source Fine time synchronization source

3.15.2
3.15.2.1
Table 59:
Name CoarseSyncSrc FineSyncSource

SyncMaster

Off

Activate IED as synchronization master

3.15.3
3.15.3.1
Table 60:
Name ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add

Time synchronization via SNTP

Settings
SNTP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0 - 255 0 - 255 Unit IP Address IP Address Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Description Server IP-address Redundant server IP-address

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

93

Section 3 Basic functions 3.15.4

3.15.4.1
Table 61:
Name MonthInYear

1MRS757256 D

Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN

Settings
DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 00:00 00:30 1:00 1:30 ... 48:00 Unit Step Default March Description Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

1:00

UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time starts

94

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Time system, summer time ends DSTEND

Settings
DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 00:00 00:30 1:00 1:30 ... 48:00 Unit Step Default October Description Month in year when daylight time ends

3.15.5
3.15.5.1
Table 62:
Name MonthInYear

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

1:00

UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time ends

3.15.6
3.15.6.1
Table 63:
Name NoHalfHourUTC

Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE

Settings
TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) -24 - 24 Unit Step 1 Default 0 Description Number of half-hours from UTC

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

95

Section 3 Basic functions 3.15.7

3.15.7.1
Table 64:
Name TimeDomain Encoding

1MRS757256 D

Time synchronization via IRIG-B

Settings
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Unit Step Default LocalTime IRIG-B Description Time domain Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

3.15.8

Operation principle
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock and the time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them.
External synchronization sources Off SNTP IRIG-B DNP IEC60870-5-103 Time tagging and general synchronization Commu - nication Timeregulator Events Protection and control functions

SW- time

IEC09000210-2-en.vsd
IEC09000210 V2 EN

Figure 50:

Design of time system (clock synchronization)

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

96

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Synchronization from a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 51:

Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization with different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined in three ways. The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function

3.15.8.1

Real-time clock operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed realtime clock that provides 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time is lost completely.

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance SNTP and IRIG-B) gives an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine. If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, from its origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

97

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

used directly for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock is adjusted with 10 000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 10 000 ppm, it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

3.15.8.2

Synchronization alternatives
Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The synchronization message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time or via IRIG-B.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP time server. The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either

98

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted. To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number in the range of 1-7. If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has to come from the tool or LHMI. The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the timezone. It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages.

Synchronization via DNP

The DNP3 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization, while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol.

3.15.9

Application
Time synchronization is used to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection and control system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in the system possible. Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can be compared to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation. In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

99

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

SNTP IRIG-B Do not use the MicroSCADA OPC server as a time synchronization source.

3.15.10

Technical data
Table 65:
Function Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values

Time synchronization, time tagging

Value 1 ms

3.16
3.16.1

Denial of service
Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic is quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

3.16.2
3.16.2.1

Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT

Function block
DOSFRNT LINKUP WARNING ALARM

IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN

Figure 52:

Function block

100

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Signals
Table 66:
Name LINKUP WARNING ALARM

3.16.2.2

DOSFRNT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Ethernet link status Frame rate is higher than normal state Frame rate is higher than throttle state

3.16.2.3

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.16.2.4

Monitored data
Table 67:
Name State

DOSFRNT Monitored data

Type INTEGER Values (Range) 0=Off 1=Normal 2=Throttle 3=DiscardLow 4=DiscardAll 5=StopPoll Unit Description Frame rate control state

Quota IPPackRecNorm IPPackRecPoll IPPackDisc NonIPPackRecNorm

INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

% -

Quota level in percent 0-100 Number of IP packets received in normal mode Number of IP packets received in polled mode Number of IP packets discarded Number of non IP packets received in normal mode Number of non IP packets received in polled mode Number of non IP packets discarded

NonIPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

NonIPPackDisc

INTEGER

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

101

Section 3 Basic functions 3.16.3

3.16.3.1

1MRS757256 D

Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1

Function block
DOSLAN1 LINKUP WARNING ALARM

IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN

Figure 53:

Function block

3.16.3.2

Signals
Table 68:
Name LINKUP WARNING ALARM

DOSLAN1 Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Ethernet link status Frame rate is higher than normal state Frame rate is higher than throttle state

3.16.3.3

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.16.3.4

Monitored data
Table 69:
Name State

DOSLAN1 Monitored data

Type INTEGER Values (Range) 0=Off 1=Normal 2=Throttle 3=DiscardLow 4=DiscardAll 5=StopPoll Unit Description Frame rate control state

Quota IPPackRecNorm IPPackRecPoll IPPackDisc

INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

% -

Quota level in percent 0-100 Number of IP packets received in normal mode Number of IP packets received in polled mode Number of IP packets discarded

Table continues on next page

102

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Name NonIPPackRecNorm Type INTEGER Values (Range) Unit Description Number of non IP packets received in normal mode Number of non IP packets received in polled mode Number of non IP packets discarded

NonIPPackRecPoll

INTEGER

NonIPPackDisc

INTEGER

3.16.4

Operation principle
The denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED communication load and, if necessary, limit it to avoid compromising the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has three outputs. LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

3.17
3.17.1

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Functionality
IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows IEDs from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided. The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. Each channel has a quota of 10 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channel is blocked until the event changes is below the quota.

3.17.2

Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 70:
Protocol

Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Ethernet 100BASE-TX RJ-45 100BASE-FX LC Serial Glass fibre (ST connector) -

IEC 6185081 = Supported

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

103

Section 3 Basic functions 3.17.3 Application

1MRS757256 D

The IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI clients. It allows horizontal communication between two or more IEDs from one or several vendors to exchange information, and to use it in the performance of their functions and for correct co-operation. GOOSE, which is part of the IEC 6185081 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst themselves, using a publishsubscribe mechanism. When detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify the devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can report its status by publishing a GOOSE message. It can also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network. The analog output data from the load shedding function block, such as sheddable load and load mismatch, is connected to the A4ARDR function block for recording the changes in the output data over a specified period of time. This recording is initaiated by a binary trigger connected to one of the BXRBDR components. A pretrigger time (max. value = 3 s) and a post-trigger time (max value = 10 s) can be configured, and the changes during the configured time period is recorded. These changes can be viewed using the Disturbance Recording Viewing tool. Apart from generating the disturbance records, BXRBDR can be used for creating process events and for configuring the start and trip LED on the LHMI overlay. Binary output from the load shedding function block can be connected to the BxRBDR block to generate the process events. IEC 6185081 specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system integrator.

104

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Engineering Workstation SMS

Station HSI Base System

Gateway CC

Printer

IED 1
KIOSK 1

IED 2

IED 3

IED 1
KIOSK 2

IED 2

IED 3

IED 1
KIOSK 3

IED 2

IED 3

IEC09000135_en.v sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN

Figure 54:

Example of a communication system with IEC 6185081

Station HSI MicroSCADA

Gateway

GOOSE

IED A Control
IEC05000734 V1 EN

IED A Protection

IED A Control and protection

IED A Control

IED A Protection en05000734.vsd

Figure 55:

Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message, peer-to-peer communication

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

105

Section 3 Basic functions

3.17.3.1 Horizontal communication via GOOSE

1MRS757256 D

GOOSE messages are sent in horizontal communication between the IEDs. The information, which is exchanged, is used for station wide interlocking, breaker failure protection, busbar voltage selection and so on. The simplified principle is shown in Figure 56. When IED1 has decided to transmit the data set it forces a transmission via the station bus. All other IEDs receive the data set, but only those who have this data set in their address list takes it and keeps it in an input container. It is defined, that the receiving IED takes the content of the received data set and makes it available for the application configuration.
Stationbus

IED1

IED2

IED3

DO1 IED1 IED1 IED1 IED1 IED1 IED1 DO1/DA1 DO1/DA2 DO2/DA1 DO2/DA2 DO3/DA1 DO3/DA2 IED1 IED1 IED1 IED1 IED1 IED1 DO1/DA1 DO1/DA2 DO2/DA1 DO2/DA2 DO3/DA1 DO3/DA2

DA1 DA2 DA1 DA2 DA1 DA2

SMT

DO3

DO2

Receive-FB
FBa FBb FBc

PLC Program IEC08000145.vsd

IEC08000145 V1 EN

Figure 56:

SMT: GOOSE principle and signal routing with Signal Matrix

Special function blocks take the data set and present it via the function block as output signals for application functions in the application configuration. Different GOOSE receive function blocks are available for the specific tasks. Signal Matrix links the different data object attributes (for example stVal or magnitude) to the output signal to make it available for functions in the application configuration. When a matrix cell array is marked red the IEC 61850-8-1 data attribute type does not fit together, even if the GOOSE receive function block is the partner. Signal Matrix checks this on the content of the received data set.

106

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

IEC08000174.vsd
IEC08000174 V1 EN

Figure 57:

SMT: GOOSE marshalling with Signal Matrix

GOOSE receive function blocks extract process information, received by the data set, into single attribute information that can be used within the application configuration. Crosses in the SMT matrix connect received values to the respective function block signal in Signal Matrix.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

107

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

GUID-45DC6974-4291-4F1B-B59B-738930268E3F V1 EN

108

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

GUID-CCE35022-C0B7-4F5A-BA9A-36A6E46AAC24 V1 EN

Figure 58:

SMT: GOOSE receive function block with converted signals

3.17.4
Table 71:
Name Operation

Settings
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operation Off/On

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

109

Section 3 Basic functions 3.17.5 Technical data

Table 72:
Function Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs

1MRS757256 D

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Value IEC 61850-8-1 100BASE-FX IEC 6085103 9600 or 19200 Bd DNP3.0 30019200 Bd TCP/IP, Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

3.18
3.18.1

GOOSE receive GOOSEPWRFDRRCV

Function block
GOOSEPWRFDRRCV BLOCK SPSOUT1 SPSDATAVALID1 SPSCOMMVALID1 SPSOUT2 SPSDATAVALID2 SPSCOMMVALID2 DPSOUT DPSDATAVALID DPSCOMMVALID MVOUT MVDATAVALID MVCOMMVALID DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST
GUID-58C26A98-D670-4723-8BBE-B04C0B2C8938 V1 EN

Figure 59:

Function block

3.18.2

Functionality
GOOSEPWRFDRRCV is a GOOSE receive function block used for receiving a set of data from IEDs associated with load shed and network circuit breakers, required to handle the load shedding functionality.

3.18.3

Signals
Table 73:
Name BLOCK

GOOSEPWRFDRRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of output signals

110

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 74:
Name SPSOUT1

GOOSEPWRFDRRCV Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description SPS output 1 Valid data on SPS output 1 Communication valid for SPS output 1 SPS output 2 Valid data on SPS output 2 Communication valid for SPS output 2 SPS output 3 Valid data on SPS output 3 Communication Valid for SPS Output 3 SPS output 4 Valid data on SPS output 4 Communication Valid for SPS Output 4 SPS output 5 Valid data on SPS output 5 Communication Valid for SPS Output 5 DPS output Valid data on DPS output Communication valid for DPS output MV output Valid data on MV output Communication valid for MV output Data valid Communication valid Test output

SPSDATAVALID1 SPSCOMMVALID1 SPSOUT2 SPSDATAVALID2 SPSCOMMVALID2 SPSOUT3 SPSDATAVALID3 SPSCOMMVALID3 SPSOUT4 SPSDATAVALID4 SPSCOMMVALID4 SPSOUT5 SPSDATAVALID5 SPSCOMMVALID5 DPSOUT DPSDATAVALID DPSCOMMVALID MVOUT MVDATAVALID MVCOMMVALID DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST

3.18.4
Table 75:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEPWRFDRRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operation Off/On

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

111

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.19
3.19.1

GOOSE receive GOOSEPWRSRCRCV

Function block
GOOSEPWRSRCRCV BLOCK SPSOUT1 SPSDATAVALID1 SPSCOMMVALID1 SPSOUT2 SPSDATAVALID2 SPSCOMMVALID2 SPSOUT3 SPSDATAVALID3 SPSCOMMVALID3 SPSOUT4 SPSDATAVALID4 SPSCOMMVALID4 DPSOUT1 DPSDATAVALID1 DPSCOMMVALID1 DPSOUT2 DPSDATAVALID2 DPSCOMMVALID2 MVOUT1 MVDATAVALID1 MVCOMMVALID1 MVOUT2 MVDATAVALID2 MVCOMMVALID2 MVOUT3 MVDATAVALID3 MVCOMMVALID3 MVOUT4 MVDATAVALID4 MVCOMMVALID4 MVOUT5 MVDATAVALID5 MVCOMMVALID5 MVOUT6 MVDATAVALID6 MVCOMMVALID6 MVOUT7 MVDATAVALID7 MVCOMMVALID7 MVOUT8 MVDATAVALID8 MVCOMMVALID8 DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST

GUID-6865A275-DD6E-44C0-9FA7-EC7148D1024C V1 EN

Figure 60:

Function block

3.19.2

Functionality
GOOSEPWRSRCRCV is a GOOSE receive function block used for receiving a set of data required for load shedding functionality from IEDs associated with power sources like generators and grid transformers.

112

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Signals

Table 76:
Name BLOCK

3.19.3

GOOSEPWRSRCRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of output signals

Table 77:
Name SPSOUT1

GOOSEPWRSRCRCV Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN Description SPS output 1 Valid data on SPS output 1 Communication valid for SPS output 1 SPS output 2 Valid data on SPS output 2 Communication valid for SPS output 2 SPS output 3 Valid data on SPS output 3 Communication valid for SPS output 3 SPS output 4 Valid data on SPS output 4 Communication valid for SPS output 4 DPS output 1 Valid data on DPS output 1 Communication valid for DPS output 1 DPS output 2 Valid data on DPS output 2 Communication valid for DPS output 2 MV output 1 Valid data on MV output 1 Communication valid for MV output 1 MV output 2 Valid data on MV output 2 Communication valid for MV output 2 MV output 3 Valid data on MV output 3 Communication valid for MV output 3 MV output 4 Valid data on MV output 4 Communication valid for MV output 4 MV output 5 Valid data on MV output 5

SPSDATAVALID1 SPSCOMMVALID1 SPSOUT2 SPSDATAVALID2 SPSCOMMVALID2 SPSOUT3 SPSDATAVALID3 SPSCOMMVALID3 SPSOUT4 SPSDATAVALID4 SPSCOMMVALID4 DPSOUT1 DPSDATAVALID1 DPSCOMMVALID1 DPSOUT2 DPSDATAVALID2 DPSCOMMVALID2 MVOUT1 MVDATAVALID1 MVCOMMVALID1 MVOUT2 MVDATAVALID2 MVCOMMVALID2 MVOUT3 MVDATAVALID3 MVCOMMVALID3 MVOUT4 MVDATAVALID4 MVCOMMVALID4 MVOUT5 MVDATAVALID5

Table continues on next page PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 113

Section 3 Basic functions

Name MVCOMMVALID5 MVOUT6 MVDATAVALID6 MVCOMMVALID6 MVOUT7 MVDATAVALID7 MVCOMMVALID7 DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST Type BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description

1MRS757256 D

Communication valid for MV output 5 MV output 6 Valid data on MV output 6 Communication valid for MV output 6 MV output 7 Valid data on MV output 7 Communication valid for MV output 7 Data valid Communication valid Test output

3.19.4
Table 78:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEPWRSRCRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operation Off/On

114

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

3.20
3.20.1

Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV BLOCK ^RESREQ ^RESGRANT ^APP1_OP ^APP1_CL APP1VAL ^APP2_OP ^APP2_CL APP2VAL ^APP3_OP ^APP3_CL APP3VAL ^APP4_OP ^APP4_CL APP4VAL ^APP5_OP ^APP5_CL APP5VAL ^APP6_OP ^APP6_CL APP6VAL ^APP7_OP ^APP7_CL APP7VAL ^APP8_OP ^APP8_CL APP8VAL ^APP9_OP ^APP9_CL APP9VAL ^APP10_OP ^APP10_CL APP10VAL ^APP11_OP ^APP11_CL APP11VAL ^APP12_OP ^APP12_CL APP12VAL ^APP13_OP ^APP13_CL APP13VAL ^APP14_OP ^APP14_CL APP14VAL ^APP15_OP ^APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL

IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN

Figure 61:

Function block

3.20.2

Signals
Table 79:
Name BLOCK

GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of output signals

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

115

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 80:
Name RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL

GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Reservation request Reservation granted Apparatus 1 position is open Apparatus 1 position is closed Apparatus 1 position is valid Apparatus 2 position is open Apparatus 2 position is closed Apparatus 2 position is valid Apparatus 3 position is open Apparatus 3 position is closed Apparatus 3 position is valid Apparatus 4 position is open Apparatus 4 position is closed Apparatus 4 position is valid Apparatus 5 position is open Apparatus 5 position is closed Apparatus 5 position is valid Apparatus 6 position is open Apparatus 6 position is closed Apparatus 6 position is valid Apparatus 7 position is open Apparatus 7 position is closed Apparatus 7 position is valid Apparatus 8 position is open Apparatus 8 position is closed Apparatus 8 position is valid Apparatus 9 position is open Apparatus 9 position is closed Apparatus 9 position is valid Apparatus 10 position is open Apparatus 10 position is closed Apparatus 10 position is valid Apparatus 11 position is open Apparatus 11 position is closed Apparatus 11 position is valid Apparatus 12 position is open Apparatus 12 position is closed Apparatus 12 position is valid

Table continues on next page

116

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Name APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Apparatus 13 position is open Apparatus 13 position is closed Apparatus 13 position is valid Apparatus 14 position is open Apparatus 14 position is closed Apparatus 14 position is valid Apparatus 15 position is open Apparatus 15 position is closed Apparatus 15 position is valid Receive communication status is valid

3.20.3
Table 81:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

117

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.21
3.21.1

Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

Function block
GOOSEBINRCV BLOCK ^OUT1 OUT1VAL ^OUT2 OUT2VAL ^OUT3 OUT3VAL ^OUT4 OUT4VAL ^OUT5 OUT5VAL ^OUT6 OUT6VAL ^OUT7 OUT7VAL ^OUT8 OUT8VAL ^OUT9 OUT9VAL ^OUT10 OUT10VAL ^OUT11 OUT11VAL ^OUT12 OUT12VAL ^OUT13 OUT13VAL ^OUT14 OUT14VAL ^OUT15 OUT15VAL ^OUT16 OUT16VAL IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN

Figure 62:

Function block

3.21.2

Signals
Table 82:
Name BLOCK

GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of output signals

Table 83:
Name OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3

GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Binary output 1 Valid data on binary output 1 Binary output 2 Valid data on binary output 2 Binary output 3

Table continues on next page 118 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Name OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16 OUT16VAL Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Valid data on binary output 3 Binary output 4 Valid data on binary output 4 Binary output 5 Valid data on binary output 5 Binary output 6 Valid data on binary output 6 Binary output 7 Valid data on binary output 7 Binary output 8 Valid data on binary output 8 Binary output 9 Valid data on binary output 9 Binary output 10 Valid data on binary output 10 Binary output 11 Valid data on binary output 11 Binary output 12 Valid data on binary output 12 Binary output 13 Valid data on binary output 13 Binary output 14 Valid data on binary output 14 Binary output 15 Valid data on binary output 15 Binary output 16 Valid data on binary output 16

3.21.3
Table 84:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

119

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.22
3.22.1

GOOSE function block to receive a double point GOOSEDPRCV

Function block
GOOSEDPRCV BLOCK ^DPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 63:

Function block

3.22.2

Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

3.22.3

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data. The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen. The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode. The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by means of a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.22.4

Signals
Table 85:
Name BLOCK

GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of function

120

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 86:
Name DPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST

GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Double point output Data valid for double point output Communication valid for double point output Test output

3.22.5
Table 87:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

3.23
3.23.1

GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV

Function block
BLOCK GOOSEINTRCV ^INTOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 64:

Function block

3.23.2

Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

3.23.3

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data. The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen. The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

121

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by means of a cross to receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.23.4

Signals
Table 88:
Name BLOCK

GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of function

Table 89:
Name INTOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST

GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Integer output Data valid for integer output Communication valid for integer output Test output

3.23.5
Table 90:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

122

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

3.24
3.24.1

GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV

Function block
BLOCK GOOSEMVRCV ^MVOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 65:

Function block

3.24.2

Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

3.24.3

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data. The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen. The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode. The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by means of a cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.24.4

Signals
Table 91:
Name BLOCK

GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of function

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

123

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 92:
Name MVOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST

GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Type REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Measurand value output Data valid for measurand value output Communication valid for measurand value output Test output

3.24.5
Table 93:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

124

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

3.25
3.25.1

GOOSE function block to receive data sets required for load shedding GOOSEINTMVRCV
Function block
GOOSEINTMVRCV
BLOCK DPSOUT1 DPSDATAVALID1 DPSCOMMVALID1 DPSOUT2 DPSDATAVALID2 DPSCOMMVALID2 MVOUT1 MVDATAVALID1 MVCOMMVALID1 MVOUT2 MVDATAVALID2 MVCOMMVALID2 MVOUT3 MVDATAVALID3 MVCOMMVALID3 MVOUT4 MVDATAVALID4 MVCOMMVALID4 INSOUT1 INSDATAVALID1 INSCOMMVALID1 INSOUT2 INSDATAVALID2 INSCOMMVALID2 INSOUT3 INSDATAVALID3 INSCOMMVALID3 INSOUT4 INSDATAVALID4 INSCOMMVALID4 DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST
GUID-5B66A55B-95C7-4F59-AD8B-A1F2063753A4 V1 EN

Figure 66:

Function block

3.25.2

Functionality
The GOOSE receive function block GOOSEINTMVRCV is used for receiving a set of data required for load-shedding and manual load-shedding functionality from an external system/IEDs with the power sources like generators and grid transformers.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

125

Section 3 Basic functions 3.25.3 Signals

Table 94:
Name BLOCK

1MRS757256 D

GOOSEINTMVRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of output signals

Table 95:
Name DPSOUT1

GOOSEINTMVRCV Output signals

Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description DPS output 1 Valid data on DPS output 1 Communication Valid for DPS Output 1 DPS output 2 Valid data on DPS output 2 Communication Valid for DPS Output 2 MV output 1 Valid data on MV output 1 Communication Valid for MV Output 1 MV output 2 Valid data on MV output 2 Communication Valid for MV Output 2 MV output 3 Valid data on MV output 3 Communication Valid for MV Output 3 MV output 4 Valid data on MV output 4 Communication Valid for MV Output 4 INS output 1 Valid data on INS output 1 Communication Valid for INS Output 1 INS output 2 Valid data on INS output 2 Communication Valid for INS Output 2 INS output 3 Valid data on INS output 3 Communication Valid for INS Output 3 INS output 4 Valid data on INS output 4 Communication Valid for INS Output 4 Data valid Communication valid Test Output PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

DPSDATAVALID1 DPSCOMMVALID1 DPSOUT2 DPSDATAVALID2 DPSCOMMVALID2 MVOUT1 MVDATAVALID1 MVCOMMVALID1 MVOUT2 MVDATAVALID2 MVCOMMVALID2 MVOUT3 MVDATAVALID3 MVCOMMVALID3 MVOUT4 MVDATAVALID4 MVCOMMVALID4 INSOUT1 INSDATAVALID1 INSCOMMVALID1 INSOUT2 INSDATAVALID2 INSCOMMVALID2 INSOUT3 INSDATAVALID3 INSCOMMVALID3 INSOUT4 INSDATAVALID4 INSCOMMVALID4 DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST 126

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Settings

GOOSEINTMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operation Off/On

3.25.4
Table 96:
Name Operation

3.26
3.26.1

GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV

Function block
GOOSESPRCV BLOCK ^SPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 67:

Function block

3.26.2

Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via GOOSE.

3.26.3

Operation principle
The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data. The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen. The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode. The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by means of a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the DATAVALID output is LOW.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

127

Section 3 Basic functions 3.26.4 Signals

Table 97:
Name BLOCK

1MRS757256 D

GOOSESPRCV Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Block of function

Table 98:
Name SPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST

GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Single point output Data valid for single point output Communication valid for single point output Test output

3.26.5
Table 99:
Name Operation

Settings
GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

3.27
3.27.1

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function SPGGIO

Function block
SPGGIO BLOCK ^IN IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN

Figure 68:

Function block

3.27.2

Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

128

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

3.27.3

3.27.4

Application
IEC 61850-8-1 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) function is used to send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It has one visible input, that should be connected in ACT.

3.27.5

Signals
Table 100:
Name BLOCK IN

SPGGIO Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Block of function Input status

3.27.6

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

129

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.28
3.28.1

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO

Function block
SP16GGIO BLOCK ^IN1 ^IN2 ^IN3 ^IN4 ^IN5 ^IN6 ^IN7 ^IN8 ^IN9 ^IN10 ^IN11 ^IN12 ^IN13 ^IN14 ^IN15 ^IN16 IEC09000238_en_1.vsd
IEC09000238 V1 EN

Figure 69:

SP16GGIO function block

3.28.2

Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO function is used to send up to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.

3.28.3

Operation principle
Upon receiving signals at its inputs, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the engineering manual and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information. There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an OR type output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in the Parameter Setting tool.

130

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Signals

Table 101:
Name BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16

3.28.4

SP16GGIO Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Input 1 status Input 2 status Input 3 status Input 4 status Input 5 status Input 6 status Input 7 status Input 8 status Input 9 status Input 10 status Input 11 status Input 12 status Input 13 status Input 14 status Input 15 status Input 16 status

3.28.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.28.6

Monitored data
Table 102:
Name OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6

SP16GGIO Monitored data

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Values (Range) Unit Description Output 1 status Output 2 status Output 3 status Output 4 status Output 5 status Output 6 status

Table continues on next page PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 131

Section 3 Basic functions

Name OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 OUTOR Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Values (Range) Unit -

1MRS757256 D

Description Output 7 status Output 8 status Output 9 status Output 10 status Output 11 status Output 12 status Output 13 status Output 14 status Output 15 status Output 16 status Output status logic OR gate for input 1 to 16

3.29
3.29.1

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function MVGGIO

Function block
MVGGIO BLOCK ^IN ^VALUE RANGE IEC09000239-2-en.vsd
IEC09000239 V2 EN

Figure 70:

Function block

3.29.2

Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

132

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it sends over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

3.29.3

3.29.4

Application
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

3.29.5

Signals
Table 103:
Name BLOCK IN

MVGGIO Input signals

Type BOOLEAN REAL Default 0 0 Description Block of function Analog input value

Table 104:
Name VALUE RANGE

MVGGIO Output signals

Type REAL INTEGER Description Magnitude of deadband value Range

3.29.6
Table 105:
Name BasePrefix

Settings
MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) micro milli unit kilo Mega Giga Tera 1 - 300 0 - 100000 -5000.00 - 5000.00 -5000.00 - 5000.00 Unit Step Default unit Description Base prefix (multiplication factor)

MV db MV zeroDb MV hhLim MV hLim

Type m% xBase xBase

1 1 0.01 0.01

10 500 900.00 800.00

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit multiplied with the base prefix (multiplication factor) High limit multiplied with the base prefix (multiplication factor)

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

133

Section 3 Basic functions

Name MV lLim MV llLim MV min MV max MV dbType Values (Range) -5000.00 - 5000.00 -5000.00 - 5000.00 -5000.00 - 5000.00 -5000.00 - 5000.00 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Unit xBase xBase xBase xBase Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Default -800.00 -900.00 -1000.00 1000.00 Dead band Description

1MRS757256 D

Low limit multiplied with the base prefix (multiplication factor) Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix (multiplication factor) Minimum value multiplied with the base prefix (multiplication factor) Maximum value multiplied with the base prefix (multiplication factor) Reporting type

MV limHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)

3.29.7

Monitored data
Table 106:
Name VALUE RANGE

MVGGIO Monitored data

Type REAL INTEGER Values (Range) 0=Normal 1=High 2=Low 3=High-High 4=Low-Low Unit Description Magnitude of deadband value Range

3.30
3.30.1

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO

Function block
DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID POSITION

IEC09000075_1_en.vsd
IEC09000075 V1 EN

Figure 71:

Function block

3.30.2

Functionality
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

134

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Operation principle

Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

3.30.3

3.30.4

Signals
Table 107:
Name OPEN CLOSE VALID

DPGGIO Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description Open indication Close indication Valid indication

Table 108:
Name POSITION

DPGGIO Output signals

Type INTEGER Description Double point indication

3.30.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.31
3.31.1
3.31.1.1

Configurable logic blocks

Standard configurable logic blocks
Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers are available to be used to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs. OR INVERTER inverts the input signal PULSETIMER can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

135

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

GATE is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not, depending on a setting XOR LOOPDELAY used to delay the output signal one execution cycle TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal; the timer has a settable time delay AND SRMEMORY is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. Set input has priority. RSMEMORY is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. Reset input has priority.

3.31.1.2

OR function block Function block

OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

IEC09000288-1-en.vsd
IEC09000288 V1 EN

Figure 72:

Function block

Functionality

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

136

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Signals
Table 109:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6

OR Input signals
Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6

Table 110:
Name OUT NOUT

OR Output signals
Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

Settings 3.31.1.3

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

Inverter function block INVERTER Function block

INVERTER INPUT OUT IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN

Figure 73:

Function block

Signals
Table 111:
Name INPUT

INVERTER Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 112:
Name OUT

INVERTER Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output signal

Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

137

Section 3 Basic functions

3.31.1.4 PULSETIMER function block Function block
PULSETIMER INPUT OUT IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN

1MRS757256 D

Figure 74:

Function block

Functionality

The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.

Signals
Table 113:
Name INPUT

PULSETIMER Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 114:
Name OUT

PULSETIMER Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output signal

Settings
Table 115:
Name t

PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 90000.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Description Pulse time length

3.31.1.5

Controllable gate function block GATE Function block

GATE INPUT OUT IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN

Figure 75:

Function block

Functionality

The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input to the output or not, depending on setting.

138

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Signals
Table 116:
Name INPUT

GATE Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 117:
Name OUT

GATE Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output signal

Settings
Table 118:
Name Operation

GATE Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default Off Description Operation Off/On

3.31.1.6

Exclusive OR function block XOR Function block

XOR INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN

Figure 76:

Function block

Functionality

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.

Signals
Table 119:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2

XOR Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input signal 1 Input signal 2

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

139

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 120:
Name OUT NOUT

XOR Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

Settings 3.31.1.7

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY Function block

LOOPDELAY INPUT OUT IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 77:

Function block

Functionality

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

Signals
Table 121:
Name INPUT

LOOPDELAY Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 122:
Name OUT

LOOPDELAY Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle

Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

140

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Timer function block TIMERSET Function block
TIMERSET INPUT ON OFF IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN

3.31.1.8

Figure 78:

Function block

Functionality

The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay, t.

Input
tdelay

On Off

tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN

Figure 79:

TIMERSET Status diagram

Signals
Table 123:
Name INPUT

TIMERSET Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 124:
Name ON OFF

TIMERSET Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal, pick-up delayed Output signal, drop-out delayed

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

141

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings
Table 125:
Name Operation t

1MRS757256 D

TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n

3.31.1.9

AND function block Function block

AND INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 OUT NOUT

IEC09000289-1-en.vsd
IEC09000289 V1 EN

Figure 80:

Function block

Functionality

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has a default value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong execution order.

Signals
Table 126:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

AND Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 1 1 1 1 Description Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4

Table 127:
Name OUT NOUT

AND Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

142

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.31.1.10

Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY Function block

SRMEMORY SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN

Figure 81:

Function block

Functionality

The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption returns the state it had before or if it is reset. For a SetReset flip-flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.
Table 128:
SET 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block

RESET OUT 1 0 1 0 NOUT 0 1 0 1

Signals
Table 129:
Name SET RESET

SRMEMORY Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input signal to set Input signal to reset

Table 130:
Name OUT NOUT

SRMEMORY Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

143

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings
Table 131:
Name Memory

1MRS757256 D

SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operating mode of the memory function

3.31.1.11

Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY Function block

RSMEMORY SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 82:

Function block

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption returns the state it had before or if it is reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 132:
SET 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET OUT Last value 0 1 0 NOUT Inverted last value 1 0 1

Signals
Table 133:
Name SET RESET

RSMEMORY Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input signal to set Input signal to reset

Table 134:
Name OUT NOUT

RSMEMORY Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

144

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings

Table 135:
Name Memory

RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operating mode of the memory function

3.31.2
3.31.2.1

Configurable logic Q/T

Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp and quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

3.31.2.2

ORQT function block Function block

ORQT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 83:

Function block

Functionality

ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

Signals
Table 136:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6

ORQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

145

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 137:
Name OUT NOUT

ORQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

Settings 3.31.2.3

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

INVERTERQT function block Function block

INVERTERQT INPUT OUT IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 84:

Function block

Signals
Table 138:
Name INPUT

INVERTERQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 139:
Name OUT

INVERTERQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output signal

Settings 3.31.2.4

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT Function block

PULSETIMERQT INPUT OUT IEC09000304-1-en.vsd
IEC09000304 V1 EN

Figure 85:

Function block

146

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Functionality

Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length and also propagates quality and time. When the input goes to 1 the output is 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then return to 0. When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the output. A change of these bits does not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

Signals
Table 140:
Name INPUT

PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 141:
Name OUT

PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN Description Output signal

Settings
Table 142:
Name t

PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 90000.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Description Pulse time length

3.31.2.5

XORQT function block Function block

XORQT INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 86:

Function block

Functionality

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 147

Section 3 Basic functions

Signals
Table 143:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2

1MRS757256 D

XORQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input signal 1 Input signal 2

Table 144:
Name OUT NOUT

XORQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

Settings 3.31.2.6

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT Function block

TIMERSETQT INPUT ON OFF IEC09000303-1-en.vsd
IEC09000303 V1 EN

Figure 87:

Function block

Functionality

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t). When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the output. A change of these bits does not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

148

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Input
tdelay

On Off

tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN

Figure 88:

TIMERSETQT function

Signals
Table 145:
Name INPUT

TIMERSETQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN Default 0 Description Input signal

Table 146:
Name ON OFF

TIMERSETQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal, pick-up delayed Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings
Table 147:
Name Operation t

TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

149

Section 3 Basic functions

3.31.2.7 ANDQT function block Function block
ANDQT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 OUT NOUT

1MRS757256 D

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 89:

Function block

Functionality

ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs. Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to just use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has a default value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong execution order.

Signals
Table 148:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

ANDQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 1 1 1 1 Description Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4

Table 149:
Name OUT NOUT

ANDQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

150

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT Function block
SRMEMORYQT SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC09000301-1-en.vsd
IEC09000301 V1 EN

3.31.2.8

Figure 90:

Function block

Functionality

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption returns to the state it had before or if it is reset. SRMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.
Table 150:
SET 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

SRMEMORYQT functionality
RESET OUT 1 0 1 0 NOUT 0 1 0 1

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

Signals
Table 151:
Name SET RESET

SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input signal to set Input signal to reset

Table 152:
Name OUT NOUT

SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

151

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings
Table 153:
Name Memory

1MRS757256 D

SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operating mode of the memory function

3.31.2.9

Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT Function block

RSMEMORYQT SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC09000302-1-en.vsd
IEC09000302 V1 EN

Figure 91:

Function block

Functionality

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flipflop after a power interruption returns to the state it had before or if it is reset.
Table 154:
SET 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

RSMEMORYQT functionality
RESET OUT 1 0 0 0 NOUT 0 1 1 1

Signals
Table 155:
Name SET RESET

RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 Description Input signal to set Input signal to reset

Table 156:
Name OUT NOUT

RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output signal Inverted output signal

152

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Settings

Table 157:
Name Memory

RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Unit Step Default On Description Operating mode of the memory function

3.31.2.10

INVALIDQT function block Function block

INVALIDQT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 VALID OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16

IEC09000305-1-en.vsd
IEC09000305 V1 EN

Figure 92:

Function block

Functionality

Function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit is set. The timestamp of an output is set to the latest timestamp of INPUT and VALID input.

Signals
Table 158:
Name INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7

INVALIDQT Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Indication input 1 Indication input 2 Indication input 3 Indication input 4 Indication input 5 Indication input 6 Indication input 7

Table continues on next page PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 153

Section 3 Basic functions

Name INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 VALID Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Description Indication input 8 Indication input 9 Indication input 10 Indication input 11 Indication input 12 Indication input 13 Indication input 14 Indication input 15 Indication input 16 Inputs are valid or not

1MRS757256 D

Table 159:
Name OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16

INVALIDQT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Indication output 1 Indication output 2 Indication output 3 Indication output 4 Indication output 5 Indication output 6 Indication output 7 Indication output 8 Indication output 9 Indication output 10 Indication output 11 Indication output 12 Indication output 13 Indication output 14 Indication output 15 Indication output 16

Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.31.3

Application
A set of standard logic blocks, like AND or OR, and timers are available for adapting the IED configuration to the specific application needs. Additional logic blocks that have the capability to propagate timestamp and quality beside the normal logical function are also available. Those blocks have a designation including the letters QT, for example, ANDQT or ORQT.

154

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions Technical data

Table 160:
Logic block AND B16I GATE IB16A INVERTER ITOR LOOPDELAY MINMAXR OR PULSETIMER RSMEMORY RTOI SRMEMORY SWITCHI SWITCHR TIMERSET XOR

3.31.4

Configurable logic blocks

Quantity with cycle time fast medium 60 5 10 5 30 10 10 5 60 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 60 5 10 5 30 10 10 10 60 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 normal 160 20 80 10 20 5 160 20 20 10 20 10 10 20 20 (0.000 90000.000) s 0.5% 25 ms Range or value (0.000 90000.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 25 ms -

Table 161:
Logic block ANDQT INVALIDQT INVERTERQT ORQT PULSETIMERQT RSMEMORYQT SRMEMORYQT TIMERSETQT XORQT

Configurable logic Q/T

Quantity with cycle time medium normal 20 6 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 100 6 100 100 30 30 30 30 30 Range or value (0.000-90000.0 00) s (0.000-90000.0 00) s Accuracy 0.5% 25 ms 0.5% 25 ms -

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

155

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.32
3.32.1

Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I

Function block
B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT

IEC09000035-1-en.vsd
IEC09000035 V1 EN

Figure 93:

Function block

3.32.2

Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.

3.32.3

Operation principle
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input freezes the output at the last value.

3.32.4

Signals
Table 162:
Name BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8

B16I Input signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Table continues on next page 156 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Name IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

Table 163:
Name OUT

B16I Output signals

Type INTEGER Description Output value

3.32.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.32.6

Monitored data
Table 164:
Name OUT

B16I Monitored data

Type INTEGER Values (Range) Unit Description Output value

3.33
3.33.1

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

Function block
IB16A BLOCK INP OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16
IEC09000036-1-en.vsd
IEC09000036 V1 EN

Figure 94:

Function block

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

157

Section 3 Basic functions 3.33.2 Functionality

1MRS757256 D

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

3.33.3

Operation principle
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16A function is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input freezes the logical outputs at the last value.

3.33.4

Signals
Table 165:
Name BLOCK INP

IB16A Input signals

Type BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 0 Description Block of function Integer Input

Table 166:
Name OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

IB16A Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16

3.33.5

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

158

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

3.34
3.34.1

Additional arithmetic and logic functions

Additional arithmetic and logic functions
The additional arithmetic or logic functions are used in the ACT level as a connection between function blocks. The available arithmetic functions are integer addition, integer division, integer multiplication, integer subtraction, real addition, real division, real multiplication, real subtraction, integer to real conversion, real to integer conversion and ten input real minimum or maximum functionalities. The available logic functions are two-input integer switch and two-input real switch functionalities.

3.34.2
3.34.2.1

ADDI function block

Function block

GUID-C7C029E0-7214-4A90-BE19-806DF678D510 V1 EN

Figure 95:

Function block

3.34.2.2

Functionality
ADDI integer adding block adds the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 together. ADDI executes the equation:
INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 + INT _ IN 2
GUID-2572C1EA-50AF-4C6D-B2EF-99F3BD78DCCF V1 EN

(Equation 1)

3.34.2.3

Signals
Table 167:
Name INT_IN1 INT_IN2

ADDI Input signals

Type INTEGER INTEGER Default 0 0 Description Integer input 1 Integer input 2

Table 168:
Name INT_OUT

ADDI Output signals

Type INTEGER Description Integer output

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

159

Section 3 Basic functions 3.34.3

3.34.3.1

1MRS757256 D

ADDR function block

Function block

GUID-7D1CAD31-BE10-49C1-BB23-87E53304EB01 V1 EN

Figure 96:

Function block

3.34.3.2

Functionality
ADDR real adding block adds the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 together. ADDR executes the equation:
REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 + REAL _ IN 2
GUID-6E181221-5580-4964-8D65-A4319CF5E804 V1 EN

(Equation 2)

3.34.3.3

Signals
Table 169:
Name REAL_IN1 REAL_IN2

ADDR Input signals

Type REAL REAL Default 0.0 0.0 Description Real input 1 Real input 2

Table 170:
Name REAL_OUT

ADDR Output signals

Type REAL Description Real output

3.34.4
3.34.4.1

DIVI function block

Function block

GUID-B761969D-C7F8-4D25-B6AE-FEBA6F9A112C V1 EN

Figure 97:

Function block

160

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Functionality
DIVI integer division block divides the INT_IN1 input by INT_IN2. The output of the division, the module of division INT_OUT_MOD and the validity of integer division in case of division by zero INT_VALID. DIVI executes two equations
INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 INT _ IN 2
(Equation 3)

3.34.4.2

GUID-7834309B-7558-4D99-9D0C-68FEC275B5A3 V1 EN

INT _ IN1 INT _ OUT _ MOD = MOD INT _ IN 2

GUID-39E9D90A-2266-4FF1-AF18-3BB2BF892A23 V1 EN

(Equation 4)

Table 171:
Input INT_IN2 Zero

INT_VALID behavior
Output INT_VALID FALSE TRUE

Lower or higher than zero

3.34.4.3

Signals
Table 172:
Name INT_IN1 INT_IN2

DIVI Input signals

Type INTEGER INTEGER Default 0 0 Description Integer input 1 Integer input 2

Table 173:
Name INT_OUT INT_VALID INT_OUT_MOD

DIVI Output signals

Type INTEGER BOOLEAN INTEGER Description Integer output Integer output validity Integer output division modulo

3.34.5
3.34.5.1

DIVR function block

Function block

GUID-6B1B85CC-3125-4429-88D9-11EBA237F658 V1 EN

Figure 98:

Function block

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

161

Section 3 Basic functions

3.34.5.2 Functionality

1MRS757256 D

DIVR real division block divides the REAL_IN1 input by REAL_IN2. The outputs are the division and the division validity in case of division by zero REAL_VALID. DIVR executes an equation
REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 REAL _ IN 2
(Equation 5)

GUID-14B9E785-FDB8-410A-BB65-3ABE49A09DA5 V1 EN

Table 174:
Input REAL_IN2 Zero

REAL_VALID behavior
Output REAL_VALID FALSE TRUE

Lower or higher than zero

3.34.5.3

Signals
Table 175:
Name REAL_IN1 REAL_IN2

DIVR Input signals

Type REAL REAL Default 0.0 0.0 Description Real input 1 Real input 2

Table 176:
Name REAL_OUT REAL_VALID

DIVR Output signals

Type REAL BOOLEAN Description Real output Real output validity

3.34.6
3.34.6.1

MULI function block

Function block

GUID-D0EA1F48-3533-45D9-8BFF-7A256919D23A V1 EN

Figure 99:

Function block

3.34.6.2

Functionality
MULI integer multiplication block multiplies the integer input INT_IN1 with the INT_IN2 integer input.

162

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

MULI executes the equation

INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 INT _ IN 2
GUID-87381AFB-2C81-4904-B026-7F7235346A3F V1 EN

(Equation 6)

3.34.6.3

Signals
Table 177:
Name INT_IN1 INT_IN2

MULI Input signals

Type INTEGER INTEGER Default 0 0 Description Integer input 1 Integer input 2

Table 178:
Name INT_OUT

MULI Output signals

Type INTEGER Description Integer output

3.34.7
3.34.7.1

MULR function block

Function block

GUID-4FA9C990-EB79-4DAA-BCD5-B970683162E7 V1 EN

Figure 100:

Function block

3.34.7.2

Functionality
MULR real multiplication block multiplies the real input REAL_IN1 with the real input REAL_IN2. MULR executes the equation:
REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 REAL _ IN 2
GUID-2351068B-A88E-40B6-A66C-C519A593321D V1 EN

(Equation 7)

3.34.7.3

Signals
Table 179:
Name REAL_IN1 REAL_IN2

MULR Input signals

Type REAL REAL Default 0.0 0.0 Description Real input 1 Real input 2

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

163

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 180:
Name REAL_OUT

MULR Output signals

Type REAL Description Real output

3.34.8
3.34.8.1

SUBI function block

Function block

GUID-6B9207E6-88BA-43C0-9017-E8BD5C25FE2B V1 EN

Figure 101:

Function block

3.34.8.2

Functionality
SUBI integer subtracting block subtracts the integer input INT_IN2 from the INT_IN1 integer input. SUBI executes the equation:
INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 INT _ IN 2
GUID-1289EF1B-D197-46B3-8F54-5FE151ECC5E3 V1 EN

(Equation 8)

3.34.8.3

Signals
Table 181:
Name INT_IN1 INT_IN2

SUBI Input signals

Type INTEGER INTEGER Default 0 0 Description Integer input 1 Integer input 2

Table 182:
Name INT_OUT

SUBI Output signals

Type INTEGER Description Integer output

164

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions SUBR function block

Function block

3.34.9
3.34.9.1

GUID-1594E7C3-491A-4F11-8250-7EBF5E67E476 V1 EN

Figure 102:

Function block

3.34.9.2

Functionality
SUBR real subtracting block subtracts the real input REAL_IN2 from the real input REAL_IN1. SUBR executes the equation:
REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 REAL _ IN 2
GUID-2BD26A2C-31AA-4660-ABC3-5675589E9E54 V1 EN

(Equation 9)

3.34.9.3

Signals
Table 183:
Name REAL_IN1 REAL_IN2

SUBR Input signals

Type REAL REAL Default 0.0 0.0 Description Real input 1 Real input 2

Table 184:
Name REAL_OUT

SUBR Output signals

Type REAL Description Real output

3.34.10
3.34.10.1

ITOR function block

Function block

GUID-E281071A-813C-4060-B076-4C79C412DEC4 V1 EN

Figure 103:

Function block

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

165

Section 3 Basic functions

3.34.10.2 Functionality

1MRS757256 D

ITOR integer to real conversion block converts the integer input IN to the real value output OUT.

3.34.10.3

Signals
Table 185:
Name IN

ITOR Input signals

Type INTEGER Default 0 Description Integer input

Table 186:
Name OUT

ITOR Output signals

Type REAL Description Real outpout

3.34.11
3.34.11.1

RTOI function block

Function block

GUID-4BBB4336-8318-4330-B65D-C49411F71BAB V1 EN

Figure 104:

Function block

3.34.11.2

Functionality
RTOI real to integer conversion block converts the real input IN to the integer value output OUT with the validity information OUT_VAL as the real value can exceed the integer size.
Table 187:
TRUE FALSE

RTOI OUT_VAL logic

Description Integer conversion valid Absolute real input size exceeds the maximum integer size

Value of OUT_VAL

3.34.11.3

Signals
Table 188:
Name INT

RTOI Input signals

Type REAL Default 0.0 Description Real input

166

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions

Table 189:
Name OUT OUT_VAL

RTOI Output signals

Type INTEGER BOOLEAN Description Integer output Output conversion validity

3.34.12
3.34.12.1

MINMAXR function block

Function block

GUID-C32ADA8A-F602-4C1C-BBCB-A7D491B94301 V1 EN

Figure 105:

Function block

3.34.12.2

Functionality
MINMAXR minimum and maximum value selector from the real input signals finds the minimum and maximum value from the ten inputs and gives the quantities of these to the outputs MIN and MAX as well as the channel number that has the absolute minimum and maximum values MIN_IN_CH and MAX_IN_CH. When using less than ten inputs, the last connected input should be connected to all the rest open inputs for correct operation.

3.34.12.3

Signals
Table 190:
Name IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10

MINMAXR Input signals

Type REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Description input channel1 input channel2 input channel3 input channel4 input channel5 input channel6 input channel7 input channel8 input channel9 input channel10

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

167

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 191:
Name MIN MAX MIN_IN_CH MAX_IN_CH

MINMAXR Output signals

Type REAL REAL INTEGER INTEGER Description Minimum value of the inputs Maximum value of the inputs Channel number having the minimum value Channel number having the maximum value

3.34.13
3.34.13.1

SWITCHI function block

Function block

GUID-657E28F9-4646-4574-AEC2-50B022C17B93 V1 EN

Figure 106:

Function block

3.34.13.2

Functionality
SWITCHI integer switching block, operated by the CTL_SW input, selects the output OUT between the inputs IN1 and IN2.
Table 192:
CTL_SW FALSE TRUE

SWITCHI output logic

OUT IN2 IN1

3.34.13.3

Signals
Table 193:
Name CTL_SW IN1 IN2

SWITCHI Input signals

Type BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER Default 1 0 0 Description Control Switch Integer input 1 Integer input 2

Table 194:
Name OUT

SWITCHI Output signals

Type INTEGER Description Integer switch output

168

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 3 Basic functions SWITCHR function block

Function block

3.34.14
3.34.14.1

GUID-63F5ED57-E6C4-40A2-821A-4814E1554663 V1 EN

Figure 107:

Function block

3.34.14.2

Functionality
SWITCHR real switching block, operated by the CTL_SW input, selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
CTL_SW FALSE TRUE OUT IN2 IN1

3.34.14.3

Signals
Table 195:
Name CTL_SW IN1 IN2

SWITCHR Input signals

Type BOOLEAN REAL REAL Default 1 0.0 0.0 Description Control Switch Real input 1 Real input 2

Table 196:
Name OUT

SWITCHR Output signals

Type REAL Description Real switch output

3.35

Factory settings restoration

In case of configuration data loss or error that prevents the IED from working properly, the configuration can be restored to the original factory state. All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are restored. For further information on restoring factory settings, contact customer support.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

169

Section 3 Basic functions

1MRS757256 D

3.36
Table 197:
Name GWAddress

GATEWAY function block

GATEWAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0 - 18 Unit IP Address Step 1 Default 0.0.0.0 Description Gateway address

3.37
Table 198:
Name SystemTime

SYSTEMTIME function block

SYSTEMTIME Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) System time Unit Step Default Description

3.38
Table 199:
Name Operation Write mode Session timeout

WEBSERVER function block

WEBSERVER Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On Writing disabled Writing enabled 2 - 60 Unit Min Step 1 Default Off Writing disabled 3 Description Operation On/Off Writing of settings enabled Session timeout

170

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 4 Protection functions

Section 4

Protection functions

4.1
4.1.1

Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC

Identification
Function description Multipurpose analog protection IEC 61850 identification MAPGAPC IEC 60617 identification MAP ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number MAP

4.1.2

Function block

GUID-75500106-5F41-4834-9D02-40282D4C7221 V1 EN

Figure 108:

Function block

4.1.3

Functionality
The multipurpose analog protection function MAPGAPC is used as a general protection with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting facilities. The function can be used as an underprotection or overprotection with a settable absolute hysteresis limit. The function operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.4

Operation principle
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of the multipurpose analog protection function can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

171

Section 4 Protection functions

1MRS757256 D

GUID-FA6A9C14-37BF-4D65-B0CD-A89F359C4EEE V1 EN

Figure 109:

Functional module diagram

Level detector
The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Start value setting. The Operation mode setting defines the direction of the level detector.
Table 200: Operation Mode
"Under"

Operation mode types

Description If the input signal AI_VALUE is lower than the set value of the Start value setting, the level detector enables the timer module. If the input signal AI_VALUE exceeds the set value of the Start value setting, the level detector enables the timer module.

"Over"

The Absolute hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal is slightly above or below the Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area. If the ENA_ADD input is activated, the threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Start value Add and Start value settings. The resulting threshold value for the comparator can be increased or decreased depending on the sign and value of the Start value Add setting.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the starting condition disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated. MAPGAPC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK_ST. The operate signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK_OPR. The

172

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 4 Protection functions

operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input signal.

4.1.5

Application
The function block can be used for any general analog signal protection, either underprotection or overprotection. The setting range is wide, allowing various protection schemes for the function. Thus, the absolute hysteresis can be set to a value that suits the application. The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function block. The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function input that detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings, for example. When the ENA_ADD input is enabled, the threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Start value Add and Start value settings. This allows a temporal increase or decrease of the level detector depending on the sign and value of the Start value Add setting, for example, when the emergency start is activated. If, for example, Start value is 100, Start value Add is 20 and the ENA_ADD input is active, the input signal needs to rise above 120 before MAPGAPC operates.

4.1.6

Signals
Table 201:
Name AI_VALUE BLOCK BLK_OPR BLK_ST FR_TIMER ENA_ADD

MAPGAPC Input signals

Type REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Analog input value Block overall function Block operate output Block start output Freeze internal operate timer Enable start using added start value

Table 202:
Name OPERATE START

MAPGAPC Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Operated Started signal

4.1.7
Table 203:
Name Start value Start value Add Operate delay time

Settings
MAPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) -10000.0 - 10000.0 -100.0 - 100.0 0.03 - 200.00 Unit s Step 0.1 0.1 0.01 Default 0.0 0.0 0.03 Description Start value Added value to start value Operate delay time

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

173

Section 4 Protection functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 204:
Name Operation Operation mode

MAPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) Off On Over Under Unit Step Default On Over Description Operation Off/On Operation mode (1=Over;2=Under)

Table 205:
Name

MAPGAPC Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.01 - 100.00 0.00 - 60.00 Unit s Step 0.01 0.01 Default 0.10 0.00 Description Absolute hysteresis for operation Reset delay time

Absolute hysteresis Reset delay time

4.1.8

Measured values
Table 206:
Name AI_VALUE BLOCK BLK_OPR BLK_ST FR_TIMER ENA_ADD

MAPGAPC Measured values

Type REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Analog input value Block overall function Block operate output Block start output Freeze internal operate timer Enable start using added start value

4.1.9

Monitored data
Table 207:
Name OPERATE START START_DUR

MAPGAPC Monitored data

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit % Description Operated Started signal Start duration in percentage of the total operating time

4.1.10

Technical data
Table 208:
Characteristic Operate time accuracy

MAPGAPC Technical data

Value 1.0% of the set value or 20 ms

174

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 5 Supervision functions

Section 5

Supervision functions

5.1
5.1.1

Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT

Identification
Function description Station battery supervision function IEC 61850 identification SPVNZBAT IEC 60617 identification U<> ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

5.1.2

Function block

GUID-CB57D54A-0413-4A02-AF8C-C745B2CB8621 V1 EN

Figure 110:

Function block

5.1.3

Functionality
The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery terminal voltage. SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage exceeds the set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the overvoltage and undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time characteristics. In the definite time (DT) mode, SPVNZBAT operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the battery undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

5.1.4

Operation principle
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

175

Section 5 Supervision functions

1MRS757256 D

The function execution requires that at least one of the function outputs is connected in configuration. The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-800F5217-5187-4686-8C71-EDB4288A849E V1 EN

Figure 111:

Functional module diagram

The battery rated voltage is set with the Battery voltage Rtg setting. The value of the Low battery value and High battery value settings are given in relative per unit to the Battery voltage Rtg setting.

Level detector 1
The level detector compares the battery voltage U_BATT_IN to the set value of the Low battery value setting. If the value of U_BATT_IN input drops below the value of the Low battery value setting, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer 1 module. The measured voltage between the battery terminals U_BATT is available in monitored data view.

Level detector 2
The level detector compares the battery voltage U_BATT_IN to the set value of the High battery value setting. If the value of U_BATT_IN exceeds the set value of the High battery value setting, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer 2 module.

Timer 1
Once activated, the timer activates the ST_ULOW output for undervoltage condition. When the operate timer has reached the value set by the Alarm delay time setting, the AL_ULOW output is activated. If the voltage returns to normal value before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the ST_ULOW output is deactivated.

176

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 5 Supervision functions

The activation of the BLOCK input resets the timer and deactivates the ST_ULOW and AL_ULOW outputs. The activation of BLK_ST and BLK_AL blocks the individual start and alarm outputs respectively.

Timer 2
Once activated, the timer activates ST_UHIGH for overvoltage condition. When the operate timer has reached the value set by the Alarm delay time setting, the AL_UHIGH output is activated. If the voltage returns to normal value before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the ST_UHIGH output is deactivated. The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the timer and deactivates the ST_UHIGH and AL_UHIGH outputs. The activation of BLK_ST and BLK_AL blocks the individual alarm and operate outputs respectively.

5.1.5

Application
Usually, the load on the DC system is a constant resistance load, for example, lamps, LEDs, electronic instruments and electromagnetic contactors in a steady state condition. A transient RL load exists when breakers are tripped or closed. The battery voltage has to be continuously monitored as the batteries can withstand moderate overvoltage and undervoltage only for a short period of time. If the battery is subjected to a prolonged or frequent overvoltage, it leads to the ageing of the battery, which may lead to the earlier failure of the battery. The other occurrences may be the thermal runaway, generation of heat or increased amount of hydrogen gas and the depletion of fluid in case of valve regulated batteries. If the value of the charging voltage drops below the minimum recommended float voltage of the battery, the battery does not receive sufficient charging current to offset internal losses, resulting in a gradual loss of capacity. If a lead acid battery is subjected to a continuous undervoltage, heavy sulfation occurs on the plates, which leads to the loss of the battery capacity.

5.1.6

Signals
Table 209:
Name U_BATT_IN BLOCK BLK_AL BLK_ST

SPVNZBAT Input signals

Type REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.00 0 0 0 Description Battery terminal voltage Block of function Blocks the alarm signals Blocks the start signals

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

177

Section 5 Supervision functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 210:
Name AL_ULOW AL_UHIGH ST_ULOW ST_UHIGH

SPVNZBAT Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Alarm when voltage has been below lower limit for a set time Alarm when voltage has exceeded higher limit for a set time Start signal when battery voltage drops below lower limit Start signal when battery voltage exceeds upper limit

5.1.7
Table 211:
Name Operation Battery voltage Rtg Low battery value High battery value Alarm delay time

Settings
SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 20.00 - 250.00 0.60 - 1.40 0.60 - 1.40 0.100 - 60.000 Unit V pu pu s Step 1.00 0.01 0.01 0.001 Default On 110.00 0.70 1.20 0.200 Description Operation Off/On Battery rated voltage Lower limit for the battery terminal voltage Upper limit for the battery terminal voltage Delay time for alarm

Table 212:
Name Reset delay time

SPVNZBAT Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0.000 - 60.000 Unit s Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Description Reset time provided to reset the timers

5.1.8

Measured values
Table 213:
Name U_BATT_IN BLOCK BLK_AL BLK_ST

SPVNZBAT Measured values

Type REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.00 0 0 0 Description Battery terminal voltage Block of function Blocks the alarm signals Blocks the start signals

178

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 5 Supervision functions Monitored Data

Table 214:
Name U_BATT AL_ULOW

5.1.9

SPVNZBAT Monitored data

Type REAL BOOLEAN Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit kV Description Service value of the battery terminal voltage Alarm when voltage has been below lower limit for a set time Alarm when voltage has exceeded higher limit for a set time Start signal when battery voltage drops below lower limit Start signal when battery voltage exceeds upper limit

AL_UHIGH

BOOLEAN

ST_ULOW

BOOLEAN

ST_UHIGH

BOOLEAN

5.1.10

Technical data
Table 215:
Characteristic Operation accuracy Operate time accuracy

SPVNZBAT Technical data

Value 1.0% of the set value 1.0% of the set value or 40 ms

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

179

180

1MRS757256 D

Section 6 Measurement functions

Section 6

Measurement functions

6.1
6.1.1

Three-phase current CMMXU

Identification
Function description Three-phase current measurement IEC 61850 identification CMMXU IEC 60617 identification 3I ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number 3I

6.1.2

Function block

GUID-59A05E73-834D-4DF8-818B-F9EAF0392ADB V1 EN

Figure 112:

Function block

6.1.3

Signals
Table 216:
Name I3P

CMMXU Input signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL Default Description Three phase group signal for current inputs

Table 217:
Name I_INST_A I_DB_A I_ANGL_A I_RANGE_A

CMMXU Output signals

Type REAL REAL REAL INTEGER Description Phase A amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value Phase A amplitude, magnitude of reported value Phase A angle, instantaneous value Phase A amplitude range

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

181

Section 6 Measurement functions

Name I_INST_B I_DB_B I_ANGL_B I_RANGE_B I_INST_C I_DB_C I_ANGL_C I_RANGE_C Type REAL REAL REAL INTEGER REAL REAL REAL INTEGER Description

1MRS757256 D

Phase B amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value Phase B amplitude, magnitude of reported value Phase B angle, instantaneous value Phase B amplitude range Phase C amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value Phase C amplitude, magnitude of reported value Phase C angle, instantaneous value Phase C amplitude range

6.1.4
Table 218:
Name Operation A deadband PhA A Hi high Lim PhA A high limit PhA A low limit PhA A low low Lim PhA A minimum PhA A maximum PhA A Db type PhA

Settings
CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Off On 1 - 300 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 Unit Type A A A A A A Step 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Default On 10 500.0 400.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 500.0 Cyclic Description Operation On / Off Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

A deadband PhB A Hi high Lim PhB A high limit PhB A low limit PhB A low low Lim PhB A minimum PhB A maximum PhB A Db type PhB

Type A A A A A A -

1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 -

10 500.0 400.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 500.0 Cyclic

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

A deadband PhC A Hi high Lim PhC A high limit PhC

Type A A

1 0.1 0.1

10 500.0 400.0

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page 182 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 6 Measurement functions

Values (Range) 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 0.0 - 100000.0 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Unit A A A A Step 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 500.0 Cyclic Description Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

Name A low limit PhC A low low Lim PhC A minimum PhC A maximum PhC A Db type PhC

Table 219:
Name

CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) 0 - 100000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 0.000 - 100.000 0 - 100000 0.000 - 100.000 Unit m% % m% % m% % Step 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 0.001 Default 500 5.000 500 5.000 500 5.000 Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

A Zer deadband PhA A limit Hys PhA A Zer deadband PhB A limit Hys PhB A Zer deadband PhC A limit Hys PhC

6.1.5

Monitored data
Table 220:
Name I_INST_A

CMMXU Monitored data

Type REAL Values (Range) Unit A Description Phase A amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value Phase A amplitude, magnitude of reported value Phase A angle, instantaneous value Phase A amplitude range

I_DB_A

REAL

I_ANGL_A I_RANGE_A

REAL INTEGER

0=Normal 1=High 2=Low 3=High-High 4=Low-Low -

deg -

I_INST_B

REAL

Phase B amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value Phase B amplitude, magnitude of reported value Phase B angle, instantaneous value

I_DB_B

REAL

I_ANGL_B

REAL

deg

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

183

Section 6 Measurement functions

Name I_RANGE_B Type INTEGER Values (Range) 0=Normal 1=High 2=Low 3=High-High 4=Low-Low Unit -

1MRS757256 D

Description Phase B amplitude range

I_INST_C

REAL

Phase C amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value Phase C amplitude, magnitude of reported value Phase C angle, instantaneous value Phase C amplitude range

I_DB_C

REAL

I_ANGL_C I_RANGE_C

REAL INTEGER

0=Normal 1=High 2=Low 3=High-High 4=Low-Low

deg -

6.1.6

Technical data
Table 221:
Characteristic Operation accuracy

CMMXU Technical data

Value At the frequency f = fn 0.5% or 0.002 x In (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 x In)

Suppression of harmonics

DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, RMS: No suppression

184

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Section 7

Power management functions

7.1

Load-shedding
Load-shedding functionality ensures the power availability to critical process loads in an industrial network by dropping the less critical loads. Contingency based loadshedding is used as the primary load-shedding function in industrial systems as it is fast and selective in operation. PML630 provides system level disturbance management for small and mediumsized industrial power systems. The IED supports three types of load-shedding functions. Fast load-shedding based on network contingencies. Slow load-shedding based on overloading the grid transformer or violating the maximum demand at the grid connection. Manual load-shedding based on operator-initiated actions like priority definition or load-shedding in terms of power to be shed.

The fast or slow load-shedding functions depend on the type of the load-shedding trigger generation. While the fast load-shedding mode is triggered based on contingencies like the opening of power source circuit breaker(s), opening of bus coupler(s), opening of tie circuit breaker(s) or due to the protection operation of any of the above equipment, the slow load-shedding mode is activated due to the overloading of power sources. In both cases, the same power shortfall is used for fast and slow load-shedding actions. The slow load-shedding action is also possible with the absolute value of overloading for power source(s). Hence, the slow loadshedding mode considers the maximum of power shortfall and the absolute value of overloading amount for power source(s).
Table 222:
Network element Sources External connections to adjacent electrical network areas (with PML630-based load-shedding) Busbars/bus sections Busbars/bus sections with connected power sources Busbars/bus sections with sheddable loads connected Bus couplers/tie circuit breaker Sheddable loads per bus bar Shedding priority number assigned to sheddable loads

Power network configuration limits for PML630 in cPMS - LS Configuration A

Number 6 2 6 4 6 15 10 1..19

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

185

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

If there are no external connections to adjacent electrical network areas, the external connections can be configured as grid transformers. When the electrical network size exceeds the network definition/configuration mentioned earlier, additional PML630 is needed to handle load-shedding for an extended network. In such a scenario, the electrical network is divided into smaller network areas and each network area is allocated its own PML630 (and associated supporting feeder IEDs) that is responsible for the load-shedding functionality in that designated area. In a network segment, a PML630 exchanges information related to its own area with the adjacent areas PML630. This is to consider the overall power system data while doing load-shedding in its own area. Such a configuration is referred to as cPMS load-shedding configuration B. In cPMS load-shedding configuration B, PML630s share the spinning reserve (that is, power balance) power over GOOSE communication with each other. Loadshedding can also be initiated in one of the network areas on the opening of remote end circuit breaker or extending load-shedding action. In certain conditions, PML630 automatically reverts to the cPMS load-shedding configuration A mode. When PML630 loses communication with the PML630s of adjacent electrical areas. When the load-shedding is blocked in adjacent network areas. When the PML630s of adjacent electrical areas go into test mode. When circuit breaker is opened for external connections at either end.

For these causes, PML630 does not consider the load-shedding data received from an adjacent PML630.

7.2

Load-shedding principles and terminology

Figure 113 is a typical single-line diagram of an industrial system showing different network elements and their nomenclature in an electrical network.

186

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Power source

Bus bar

Network circuit breaker

Power source circuit breaker

Subnetwork 1 M Sheddable load

GUID-5A408CD0-8288-473B-92F1-18E64A066AAD V1 EN

Subnetwork 2 M

Bus bar

Figure 113:

Typical single-line diagram of an electrical network area

Figure 114 shows the signal flow diagrams between load-shedding functions.
G
OR

PSCSWI:X X=1,2,...8

NPMMXU

PPLSGGIO:X X=1,2

OR

NCBDCSWI:X X=1,2,...15

LSCACLS

SNWRCLS:X X=1,2,3,4

M M

LDMMXU:X X=1,2,...6

LSPTRC:X X=1,2...6

M M

GUID-D76B559E-1261-48B7-8949-50A3F9CA7F5E V1 EN

Figure 114:

Signal flow diagram

Here X = number of instance of respective functions. PPLSGGIO is instantiated based on external connection configuration.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

187

Section 7 Power management functions 7.2.1 Power flow sign conventions

1MRS757256 D

The power flow sign convention of network circuit breaker in PML630 is considered positive if the power flow direction is from the lower busbar number to the higher busbar number (for example, 1...2 or 2...4 or 1...3), else considered negative. The power flow sign convention in PML630 can be corrected by the settings Send Pow convention or Rcv Pow convention for sending-end circuit breaker IED or receiving-end circuit breaker IED respectively in NCBDCSWI, if required. Table 223 shows the correction for power flow sign convention in PML630 for bus coupler/tie circuit breaker connected between busbar = 1 and busbar = 2. Similar logic applies to other instance of network circuit breaker.
Table 223: Power flow sign convention in PML630 IED for network circuit breaker
Power flow sign convention in PML630 IED
Bus bar=1 OR Bus bar=1 Bus bar =2 Sending end circuit breaker Receiving end circuit breaker

Power flow sign convention in sending-/receiving-end CB IED

Bus bar=1 OR Bus bar=1 Bus bar =2 Sending end circuit breaker Receiving end circuit breaker

Send Pow convention or Rcv Pow convention setting Positive XX

Bus bar=2

Bus bar=2

GUID-16A8EF87-2328-4491-8B32-802A521C4869 V1 EN

GUID-16A8EF87-2328-4491-8B32-802A521C4869 V1 EN

Negative XX
Busbar=1 OR Busbar=1 Busbar =2 Sending end circuit breaker Receiving end circuit breaker Busbar=1 OR Busbar=1 Busbar =2 Sending end circuit breaker Receiving end circuit breaker

Busbar=2

Busbar=2

GUID-52ECA53D-228D-4882-B0C0-C4FCDC850B30 V1 EN

GUID-52ECA53D-228D-4882-B0C0-C4FCDC850B30 V1 EN

PML630 processes the power values in kW. Hence, sending-end circuit breaker IED power or receiving-end circuit breaker IED power units in PML630 can be converted to kW based on the Send Pow convention or Rcv Pow convention setting respectively. In Table 223, Positive XX means Positive W, Positive kW or Positive MW. See NCBDCSWI for details regarding the power unit conversion. The power flow sign convention of the source in PML630 is positive if the power flow direction is towards the busbar, otherwise it is negative. The power flow sign convention in PML630 can be corrected with the Power convention setting for the power source in PSCSWI. Table 224 shows the correction for power flow sign convention in PML630 for the power source.
188 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 224:

Power flow sign convention for power source

Power flow sign convention in PML630 IED Power convention setting Positive XX

Power flow sign convention in power source CB IED

Power source circuit breaker Busbar

GUID-337D9722-FF8B-43F6-A154-C0BC2E59597E V1 EN

Bus bar
GUID-B856A532-5035-4E43-8BE5-504CA9B0A0E3 V1 EN

Negative XX

Bus bar
GUID-41BA4C68-2641-4D66-9655-D89D57D949E6 V1 EN

Bus bar
GUID-B856A532-5035-4E43-8BE5-504CA9B0A0E3 V1 EN

The power source circuit breaker IED power unit in PML630 can be converted to kW based on the Power convention setting. In Table 224, Positive XX means Positive W, Positive kW or Positive MW. See PSCSWI for details regarding the power unit conversion.

7.2.2

Compensated circuit breaker status

The compensated circuit breaker status is calculated for the power source, network circuit breaker and sheddable load for the load-shedding functionality. The compensated circuit breaker status is calculated by considering the respective circuit breaker position, IED data quality, circuit breaker in service/test and lockout protection operation as shown in Table 225.
Table 225: Conditions for compensated circuit breaker status calculation
Compensated CB status for bus coupler/tie circuit breaker Circuit breaker position Circuit breaker in service/ test IED data quality Lockout operation status Compensated CB status for load feeder Circuit breaker position IED data quality

Compensated CB status for power source Circuit breaker position Circuit breaker in service/ test IED data quality Lockout operation status

Depending on the network circuit breaker configuration as bus coupler/tie circuit breaker, the compensated circuit breaker status is calculated for the network circuit breaker. See PSCSWI,
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 189

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

NCBDCSWI and LDMMXU for details regarding compensated circuit breaker status calculation. The compensated circuit breaker status has only two states, closed or open, as confirmed.

7.2.3

Load-shedding trigger
PML630 performs load-shedding action in an electrical network area due to fast loadshedding trigger, slow load-shedding trigger, external load-shedding trigger input or manual load-shedding trigger. PML630 also performs load-shedding action in the electrical network area if load-shedding is extended from an adjacent electrical network area.

7.2.3.1

Fast load-shedding trigger

Fast load-shedding trigger due to power source, bus coupler or tie circuit breaker is initiated in the conditions as shown in Table 226.
Table 226: Conditions for fast load-shedding trigger calculation
Fast load-shedding trigger due to bus coupler/tie circuit breaker Circuit breaker position from close to open Circuit breaker position from intermediate to open Lockout operation status

Fast load-shedding trigger due to power source Circuit breaker position from closed to open Circuit breaker position from intermediate to open Lockout operation status

Depending on the network circuit breaker configuration as bus coupler/tie circuit breaker, the compensated circuit breaker status is calculated for the network circuit breaker. See PSCSWI and NCBDCSWI for details regarding fast loadshedding trigger calculation. Fast load-shedding trigger can also be initiated by the external trigger input, if configured, in the LSCACLS. In the cPMS load-shedding configuration B, the remote -end circuit breaker disconnection also initiates fast load-shedding trigger. The fast load-shedding trigger is inhibited (that is, blocked) in an individual source or network circuit breaker by an external inhibition signal in PSCSWI and NCBDCSWI respectively.

7.2.3.2

Slow load-shedding trigger

Slow load-shedding trigger due to power source is initiated in certain conditions.

190

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Phase overcurrent detection module has operated. Calculated average demand is violated. External input is configured and the input gets activated, for example transformer or feeder overcurrent IED (RET/REF630) start signals. If the power flow of the power source is away (that is, power flow direction is negative) from the busbar, slow load-shedding trigger from the respective power source is not initiated. The slow load-shedding trigger due to external input is active if the phase overcurrent detection module is enabled. See PSCSWI and NPMMXU for details regarding slow loadshedding trigger calculation.

When phase overcurrent is detected, it is expected that the actual current of power source comes down when the load feeders are tripped. If the current does not fall below the threshold value, PML630 retriggers the slow load-shedding action until the current is reduced. This retriggering of the slow load-shedding trigger due to phase overcurrent can be handled by a set interval time. The delay in updating the currents in the phase overcurrent detection module of the power source after the load feeder has tripped can also be handled by retriggering after the set interval time. The slow load-shedding trigger for the individual power source is disabled by external inputs in respective PSCSWI. The slow load-shedding trigger is inhibited (that is, blocked) for all the power sources by an external input in NPMMXU.

7.2.3.3

Manual load-shedding trigger

The manual load-shedding trigger is initiated in each subnetwork by the system operator irrespective of a power shortfall. Manual load-shedding can be executed either based on priority or power (that is, amount of load to be shed). If configured, it is also possible to execute the manual load-shedding action initiated by an external input. If an external system (such as COM600) sends information for load-shedding (priority or by power) along with an external trigger, load-shedding can be activated for the subnetwork. See LSCACLS for load-shedding action due to manual loadshedding trigger.

7.2.3.4

Extended load-shedding trigger

In cPMS load-shedding configuration B, extended load-shedding trigger is initiated from adjacent PML630s during contingency in the extended electrical network area.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

191

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

PML630 performs load-shedding action in its own area, provided that an adjacent PML630 has executed the load-shedding action and the actual shed load is less than required. PML630 receives the load-shedding information from an adjacent PML630 to shed identified loads in its own area. The load-shedding trigger is extended by an adjacent PML630, provided that a load-shedding action is initiated in the respective adjacent PML630 due to fast load-shedding trigger, external trigger input or load-shedding trigger received from another adjacent PML630. See NPMMXU, LSCACLS and PPLSGGIO for details regarding extended load-shedding action.

7.2.4

Load-shedding blocking
Load-shedding is blocked due to various conditions of power source, bus coupler or tie circuit breaker. Load-shedding blocking is calculated as shown in Table 227.
Table 227: Conditions for load-shedding blocking calculation
Load-shedding blocking due to bus coupler/tie circuit breaker Circuit breaker position is in intermediate for more than set value of circuit breaker intermediate setting. Circuit breaker position is invalid. IED data quality is bad.

Load-shedding blocking due to power source Circuit breaker position is in intermediate for more than set value of circuit breaker intermediate setting. Circuit breaker position is invalid. IED data quality is bad.

Depending on the network circuit breaker configuration as bus coupler/tie circuit breaker, the load-shedding blocking is calculated for the network circuit breaker. Load-shedding is also blocked if the power source for an external connection is not configured correctly. If the load-shedding blocking is activated due to the power source, load-shedding is blocked in the respective subnetwork where the power source is connected. If the load-shedding blocking is activated due to the network circuit breaker, loadshedding is blocked in the associated subnetworks of a network circuit breaker. If two subnetworks are formed due to the open status of the compensated circuit breaker status of the network circuit breaker and load-shedding blocking is activated from the respective

192

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

network circuit breaker, the load-shedding is blocked in both associated subnetworks. Load-shedding can also be blocked in all the subnetworks by an external input if configured in LSCACLS. The manual load-shedding action can be performed even though load-shedding is blocked in subnetworks. Load-shedding blocking calculated due to various conditions for power source or network circuit breaker can be overridden with the Block override setting in PSCSWI and NCBDCSWI respectively. See PSCSWI, NCBDCSWI and LSCACLS for details regarding loadshedding blocking calculation.

7.2.5

Power data holding and delay

PML630 holds the power data at every measurement cycle. This data is used in loadshedding calculation after the delay of one to two measurement cycles. Here, for example, T, 2T and 3T represent the measurement cycle. This deliberate delay is to ensure that the load-shedding core function LSCACLS always works on the power system data that is not influenced by a transient or a disturbance situation.

GUID-54C025E0-3CE7-4074-9B14-8929BCD54F25 V1 EN

Figure 115:

Hold and delay of power data

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

193

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

7.3
7.3.1

Load-shedding functions
Power source circuit breaker function PSCSWI
PSCSWI can be configured for generator/external source. PSCSWI receives the circuit breaker position, island and parallel information of external source, governor mode of generator source and power values of power source. PSCSWI calculates the available power, amount of overload, compensated circuit breaker status, fast load-shedding trigger, demand- or overcurrent-based slow load-shedding trigger, island or parallel mode for generator source, loadshedding blocking and load-shedding block override signals. The governor mode of the generator and the available power of the power source can be the setting or the communicated inputs received from the external IED via IEC 61850 GOOSE.

7.3.2

Load busbar monitoring function LDMMXU

LDMMXU receives the circuit breaker position and the power values of the sheddable loads connected on same busbar. LDMMXU calculates the shedding priority, operator inhibitions or system inhibition for each sheddable loads.

7.3.3

Network circuit breaker function NCBDCSWI

NCBDCSWI can be configured for tie circuit breaker or bus coupler. NCBDCSWI receives the circuit breaker position and the power values of network circuit breaker. NCBDCSWI calculates the compensated circuit breaker status, fast loadshedding trigger and load-shedding blocking.

7.3.4

Network power monitoring function NPMMXU

NPMMXU receives data for an individual source from PSCSWI. NPMMXU also receives the load-shedding data from the adjacent PML630s via IEC61850 GOOSE. NPMMXU controls the extended load-shedding functionality with the configuration of the external connection connectivity setting. NPMMXU does not consider the load-shedding data received from an adjacent PML630 if the circuit breaker is opened of the remote end or the power source for the external connection or the adjacent PML630 load-shedding is blocked in its electrical network area, the external connection in the adjacent PML630 is not configured correctly, the adjacent PML630 is in the test mode or its data quality is bad.
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

194

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

NPMMXU controls the modes by which the load-shedding data (that is, spin reserve or extended load-shedding power) can be shared to two adjacent PML630s. NPMMXU configures the phase overcurrent-based slow load-shedding trigger from continuous to periodic based on the setting. NPMMXU calculates slow load trigger, load-shedding blocking and overload amount for slow load-shedding and island/parallel status for each busbar. NPMMXU also calculates the fast load-shedding trigger common for all subnetworks due to fast load-shedding trigger generation from any power source or the opening of the circuit breaker of external connections at either end.

7.3.5

Contingency based load-shedding function LSCACLS

LSCACLS receives the load-shedding data from NPMMXU, NCBDCSWI and LDMMXU. LSCACLS identifies the network configuration of the system through the compensated circuit breaker status of the network circuit breakers. At any instance of time, a maximum of four active subnetworks can be formed. LSCACLS calculates the available power of generator based on its governor mode and island/parallel status of the busbar to which it is connected. LSCACLS also calculates the total available power, total active power, total overload amount in each subnetwork based on available powers, active powers of each source and spin reserve received from adjacent PML630s in corresponding subnetworks. The total active power represents the total loads connected in the subnetwork. The power shortfall calculation module is common for fast load-shedding trigger, slow load-shedding trigger and external trigger. LSCACLS calculates the load-shedding blocking status, fast load-shedding trigger and slow load-shedding trigger in each subnetwork. LSCACLS calculates the cumulative shedding power corresponding to each priority (from 1...19), total sheddable power, total shedding power inhibited by system and the total shedding power inhibited by operator. The cumulative shedding power at each priority determines that all the loads having priority setting less than or equal to the load-shedding priority are dropped, provided that the load-shedding triggers are active. LSCACLS calculates the load-shedding priority based on various conditions, for example, power shortfall, overloading amount, load-shedding power of adjacent electrical networks or manual load-shedding action and associated loadshedding trigger(s). Table 228 shows the load-shedding priority (p1, p2) calculation with respect to load-shedding initiation.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

195

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 228:

Load-shedding priority calculation

Shed power calculation Cumulative shedding power Power shortfall
p1

Load-shedding initiation Fast load-shedding trigger, slow load-shedding trigger or external trigger Slow load-shedding trigger Extended load-shedding trigger

Load-shedding priority calculation p1

Cumulative shedding power p2 Total overload amount Cumulative shedding power p3 load-shedding power of adjacent PML630 Cumulative shedding power p4 Manual load-shedding power Manual load-shedding priority setting = p5

p2 p3

Manual load-shedding trigger (power-based) Manual load-shedding trigger (priority-based)

p4 p5

The load-shedding priority due to slow load-shedding trigger is calculated as the maximum of p1 and p2. If the load-shedding action is initiated due to multiple load-shedding triggers simultaneously, the priority order in which the cause of load-shedding is calculated follows a certain sequence. Extended load-shedding (in combination with any other load-shedding triggers) Fast load-shedding (in combination with slow load-shedding or manual loadshedding triggers) Slow load-shedding (in combination with manual load-shedding trigger) Manual load-shedding Irrespective of multiple load-shedding trigger conditions, if the loadshedding priority is calculated corresponding to the overload amount and slow load-shedding trigger, then the cause of loadshedding is slow load-shedding. Similarly, if the load-shedding priority is calculated corresponding to the manual load-shedding priority and the manual load-shedding trigger, the cause of load-shedding is manual load-shedding.

In load-shedding blocking condition, the load-shedding in the subnetwork can be executed via the manual load-shedding trigger.

LSCACLS calculates the trip information for each load feeder connected to the busbars in the respective subnetwork based on load-shedding priority. The trip command is active for a load feeder, provided that the calculated load-

196

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

shedding priority is less than or equal to the priority setting for the respective load feeder. When load-shedding priority is calculated with LSCACLS, various subnetwork information required for subnetwork display is latched. The latched output signals can be reset through the respective reset inputs of each subnetwork. If a load-shedding action occurs before a reset of the subnetwork, the old latched outputs are replaced with the new, that is, latest, set of values. LSCACLS can record up to three load-shedding priorities. All the subnetworks can be reset from the common reset input. On activation of the reset signal, the latched outputs in the subnetworks are reset. LSCACLS calculates the spinning reserve and the extended load-shedding power of the subnetworks connected to the adjacent electrical network areas.. The spinning reserve in the subnetwork is equal to the difference of sum of the available power of all the sources and the total active power in the respective subnetwork. The extended load-shedding power in the subnetwork is equal to the difference of power shortfall and the actual shedding power, provided that the load-shedding priority is 19 and the cause of load-shedding is fast loadshedding or extended load-shedding. If PML630 is configured (cPMS configuration B) to have extended electrical networks present on both sides and both electrical networks areas are connected to the same subnetwork, the spin reserve and the extended load-shedding power to be shared with both the adjacent PML630s depends on the spin reserve sharing mode or extended load-shedding sharing mode calculated by NPMMXU.

LSCACLS also calculates the status to inform if either the spin reserve or the extended load-shedding power is active. If both the statuses are active, the extended load-shedding power status takes precedence over the spin reserve status.

7.3.6

Load-shedding trip command function LSPTRC

Each instance of LSPTRC receives load-shedding operation information for its load-shed feeders from the LSCACLS. The individual instance of LSPTRC sends operating signals to the corresponding load-shedding feeders on that busbar.

7.3.7

Subnetwork output function SNWRCLS

Each instance of SNWRCLS receives load-shedding information for the corresponding subnetwork from LSCACLS. The individual instance of SNWRCLS provides various outputs for the respective subnetwork for monitoring or supervision purposes.
197

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Section 7 Power management functions 7.3.8 Peer-to-peer load-shedding function PPLSGGIO

1MRS757256 D

Each instance of PPLSGGIO receives the data from LSCACLS and NPMMXU. The individual instances of PPLSGGIO processes the data for an extended loadshedding action. The individual instance of PPLSGGIO provides outputs for the corresponding load-shedding data of the adjacent network area. These outputs are used for monitoring purposes.
Input signal enum descriptions and corresponding values
Value 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Table 229:
Enum description Bad Good Intermediate Open Close Invalid Island Parallel Droop MW ISO P-Control Optimize Base load Peak load

7.4
7.4.1

Power-source circuit breaker PSCSWI

Identification
Table 230: Identification
IEC 61850 identification PSCSWI IEC 60617 identification ANSI/ IEEEidentification PSCSWI Function description Power source circuit breaker

198

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions Function block

PSCSWI I_A I_B I_C POWER CB_POSITION CB_SERVICE CB_LOCK_OUT CB_IED_QVAL IED_TST_MODE MAX_POWER GOVERNOR_MOD AP_GOV_QVAL ISLAND_PARAL ENA_MULT EXT_OC_SLST INHIBIT_TRG SLS_DISABLE RESET_OC RESET_DEMAND
GUID-A7713E52-6998-4D40-9741-34FE541B3CC7 V1 EN

7.4.2

SOURCE CB_COMPS_POS FLS_TRIGGER SLOWLS_OPR OC_STR OC_OPR MAX_DMD_ALM ISLND_PARALL FLS_BLOCK BLK_BYPASS B_SET_CHANGE INVAL_CRV

Figure 116:

Function block

7.4.3

Functionality
The input interface function PSCSWI processes the circuit breaker status and power values of the power source. PSCSWI identifies the load bus bar number to which the power source is connected and provides the available power, active power and the governor mode of the power source for the power balance calculation. PSCSWI calculates the compensated circuit breaker position depending on the power source IED quality status, circuit breaker position, circuit breaker service position and protection lockout status. PSCSWI generates the fast load-shedding trigger due to circuit breaker position change or protection lockout operating and slow load-shedding trigger due to the phase overcurrent detection or maximum demand violation. PSCSWI also generates the load-shedding blocking signal due to the bad data quality or power source IED in the test mode or power source circuit breaker position in intermediate or invalid, that blocks the load-shedding. When external inhibition input is active or blocking signal is active, the fast loadshedding trigger and slow load-shedding trigger are inhibited. Selecting the appropriate setting changes the power configuration, sign convention and unit of the active power. PSCSWI also has the provision to select the available power either as communication value or setting. Similarly, the governor mode for the generator can be selected from the communication value or setting.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

199

Section 7 Power management functions 7.4.4 Operation principle

1MRS757256 D

The operation of PSCSWI can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
POWER MAX_POWER GOVERNOR_MOD AP_GOV_QVAL ISLAND_PARAL IED_TST_MODE CB_IED_QVAL CB_POSITION
Block logic General logic Power monitoring

FLS_BLOCK B_SET_CHANGE CB_COMPS_POS BLK_BYPASS ISLND_PARALL

GOV_MODE AVA_POWER OVLOD_AMOUNT ACTIVE_POWER DATA_SOURCE BB_NUMBER

CB_SERVICE CB_LOCK_OUT

Compensated CB status

SOURCE

INHIBIT_TRG

Fast load shed trigger logic Binary to integer

FLS_TRIGGER

SLS_DISABLE

Slow load shed logic

SLOWLS_OPR

I_A I_B I_C ENA_MULT EXT_OC_SLST RESET_OC

Over current based load shed

OC_STR OC_OPR INVAL_CRV MAX_CURRENT

Demand based load shed

MAX_DMD_ALM

RESET_DEMAND
GUID-7C8DC2A9-1499-42BF-96CB-2E6F168C6B33 V1 EN

Figure 117:

Functional module diagram

7.4.4.1

Power monitoring
This module calculates the available power and active power of the power source. It also calculates the governor mode of the generator. The units of the POWER and MAX_POWER inputs can be W, kW or MW. This module converts the units of the POWER and MAX_POWER inputs in kW as the Power convention setting. The POWER and MAX_POWER inputs must have the same unit.

200

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 231:
Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW

The unit conversion for active power

Input POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER Calculated active power POWER [0.001] POWER [-0.001] POWER [1] POWER [-1] POWER [1000] POWER [-1000]

Power convention setting

Table 232:
Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW

The unit conversion for available power

Input MAX_POWER MAX_POWER MAX_POWER MAX_POWER MAX_POWER MAX_POWER Calculated active power MAX_POWER [0.001] MAX_POWER [-0.001] MAX_POWER [1] MAX_POWER [-1] MAX_POWER [1000] MAX_POWER [-1000]

Power convention setting

This module calculates the available power of power source as per the Ava power mode, Ava power relative and Maximum Ava power settings as shown in Table 233.
Table 233:
Ava power mode setting Set Max Ava power Set Ava Pow relative

The available power calculation

Calculated available power Available power = Maximum Ava power setting Available power = POWER input Ava power relative setting If POWER input Ava power relative setting Maximum Ava power setting or POWER input <0.0, Available power = Maximum Ava power setting

Comm Max Ava power

Available power = MAX_POWER input, provided input AP_GOV_QVAL is Good. If AP_GOV_QVAL input is Bad, Available power = Maximum Ava power setting

Comm spin reserve

Available power = POWER input + MAX_POWER input, provided input AP_GOV_QVAL is Good. If AP_GOV_QVAL input is Bad or POWER <0.0, Available power = Maximum Ava power setting

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

201

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

During the power-exporting condition, the available power and active power of the power source can be configured using the Power Cfg export Mod setting. If the Power Cfg export Mod setting is Pow & Ava Pow Zero and active power value is negative, the calculated available power and active power values are zero. If the Power Cfg export Mod setting is Pow & Ava Pow No Chg and active power value is negative, the calculated available power and active power values remain same as the calculated values. The calculated available power is reported to the Slow load shed logic module. The calculated active power is reported to the Slow load shed logic, Demand based load shed and Binary to integer modules. PSCSWI can handle the generator source or external source by setting the values of Source configure to Generator for the generator and External source for an external source. The governor mode of the generator is provided by GOV_MODE output. The GOV_MODE output is Not applicable for an external source. If the Enable Comm Gov mode setting is Enable and the AP_GOV_QVAL input is Good, the GOV_MODE output is same as the GOVERNOR_MOD input. If the Enable Comm Gov mode setting is Disable or the AP_GOV_QVAL input is Bad or the GOVERNOR_MOD input is invalid, the GOV_MODE output is same as the Governor mode setting.

7.4.4.2

Block logic
This module calculates the load-shedding blocking status based on the circuit breaker data quality, circuit breaker position or IED test mode of the power source. If the input CB_IED_QVAL (power source IED data quality) is "Bad at the measurement cycle, the load-shedding blocking status is TRUE for the duration of the CB_IED_QVAL input being "Bad" and for additional t+T time as shown in Figure 118. If the input CB_IED_QVAL is "Bad within a measurement cycle, the loadshedding blocking status is TRUE for the duration of the CB_IED_QVAL input being "Bad" as shown in Figure 119. Once the CB_IED_QVAL input changes from "Bad" to "Good", the load-shedding blocking status changes from TRUE to FALSE.

202

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

q = Bad 0 Load-shedding blocking = TRUE Load-shedding blocking = FALSE T

q = Good 2T 5T

3T

4T

GUID-AC44FCB5-C8E0-4CF2-9608-CB82879B1244 V1 EN

Figure 118:

Logic for load-shedding blocking status at the time of measurement cycle

q = Bad q = Good 0 T 2T 3T 4T 5T

Load-shedding blocking = TRUE Load-shedding blocking = FALSE

GUID-82D266F7-DA92-4661-B1BA-8AC28635BD1F V1 EN

Figure 119:

Logic for load-shedding blocking status within the measurement cycle

Where
q T, 2T, 3T t CB_IED_QVAL Measurement cycle Time between the change of CB_IED_QVAL input from Bad to Good and the next measurement cycle.

If the IED_TST_MODE input is TRUE or the CB_POSITION input is "Invalid, or the CB_POSITION input remains in the Intermediate position for more than the CB Interm time setting, the load-shedding blocking status is TRUE. The load-shedding blocking status is reported to the General logic module, Fast loadshedding trigger logic module, Slow load-shedding logic module, Over current based load-shedding module and Demand based load-shedding module.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

203

Section 7 Power management functions

7.4.4.3 Compensated CB status

1MRS757256 D

This module calculates the compensated circuit breaker status by considering the circuit breaker position, circuit breaker in service/test status and IED data quality of the power source. The conditions to set the compensated circuit breaker status as TRUE. The input CB_POSITION (power source circuit breaker position) is "Close". The input CB_SERVICE (power source circuit breaker in service) is TRUE. The input CB_LOCK_OUT (Protection lockout operation status of power source) is FALSE. The input CB_IED_QVAL is "Good".

If one or more of the above conditions are not met, compensated circuit breaker status is FALSE. If the load-shedding blocking status is activated due to bad IED data quality and the Block override setting is Quality bad CB open, then compensated CB status is FALSE. If the load-shedding blocking status is activated due to bad IED data quality and the Block override setting is Quality bad CB close, the output compensated CB status is TRUE. If the calculated compensated CB status is TRUE, the output CB_COMPS_POS is Close, else the output CB_COMPS_POS is Open. The calculated compensated circuit breaker status is reported to the Binary to integer module.

7.4.4.4

General logic
This module calculates FLS_BLOCK output, BLK_BYPASS output and island parallel status based on various conditions. The FLS_BLOCK output provides the load-shedding blocking signal after considering the override action using the Block override setting. The BLK_BYPASS output indicates the successful overridden action of the loadshedding blocking signal.

204

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 234:

Calculation of the FLS_BLOCK and BLK_BYPASS outputs

BLK_BYPASS output TRUE FALSE FLS_BLOCK output FALSE TRUE

Load-shedding blocking Block override setting conditions IED_TST_MODE = TRUE IED test mode All yes No Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open CB Interm or invalid CB_IED_QVAL = Bad Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB Open All yes No IED test mode CB Interm or invalid CB_POSITION = Intermediate or Invalid CB Interm or invalid All yes No IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open If mutiple loadshedding blocking signals are active simultaneously (IED_TST_MODE = TRUE, CB_IED_QVAL = Bad, CB_POSITION = Intermediate or Invalid) All yes CB Interm or invalid IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open No

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

TRUE FALSE

FALSE TRUE

TRUE TRUE

FALSE TRUE

FALSE

TRUE

The Block override setting is preferred to be kept as No.

If the input ISLAND_PARAL is Parallel and the compensated circuit breaker status is TRUE, the output ISLND_PARALL is Parallel, else the output ISLND_PARALL is Island. For generator, the output ISLND_PARALL remains Island.

The output B_SET_CHANGE remains active for 500 ms if one or more basic settings are changed (See Table 239 and Table 241). After 500 ms, the output B_SET_CHANGE is FALSE. The General logic module provides the FLS_BLOCK (load-shedding blocking), ISLND_PARALL (island or parallel mode) and CB_COMPS_POS (compensated circuit breaker status) signals to the Binary to integer module.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

205

Section 7 Power management functions

7.4.4.5 Fast load shed trigger logic

1MRS757256 D

This module calculates the fast load shed trigger to initiate the load-shedding action.
CB_POSITION
Close Open Intermediate Open

OR

CB_LOCK_OUT CB_SERVICE INHIBIT_TRG Load-shedding blocking

(From Block logic module)
GUID-45962C27-4CCB-4848-9F22-2B31A9656464 V1 EN

1 0

AND

FLS_TRIGGER

Figure 120:

Fast load shed trigger logic

If the BLK_BYPASS output is active, FLS_TRIGGER remains FALSE. The output FLS_TRIGGER (fast load-shedding trigger) is provided to the Binary to integer module.

7.4.4.6

Over current based load shed

This module calculates the slow load-shedding start and slow load-shedding trigger based on the phase overcurrent detection of the power source or external trigger input activation. The Slow load shed mode setting enables or disables the Over current based load shed module. If the Slow load shed mode setting is "OC & Ext Trg " or "OC, Max Dmd, Ext Trg", the Over current based load shed module is enabled, else it is disabled. This module compares the effective start value to the maximum of the I_A, I_B, I_C inputs. If the input ENA_MULT (enable start value multiplier) is TRUE, the effective start value is the product of the Start value and Start value Mult settings, else the effective start value is same as the Start value setting. If the maximum of the I_A, I_B, or I_C inputs is greater than the effective start value, the output OC_STR (overcurrent start) is TRUE, else the output OC_STR is FALSE. The maximum of the I_A, I_B, or I_C input is provided as the MAX_CURRENT output. The effective start value is provided by the PICKUP output. If the phase overcurrent is detected, the output OC_TIME (overcurrent operating time) is calculated as per the Operating curve type setting. After the operate time, the OC_OPR output is TRUE.

206

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

The calculated OC_TIME output reflects the timings when the IED receives the input currents. Hence, the actual time of the trigger matches the OC_TIME output only if the current inputs remain the same throughout the duration of the overload. If the input current changes subsequently, the OC_TIME output time also changes correspondingly. The output ELAPSE_TIME is time elapse after OC_STR is TRUE. The outputs OC_TIME and ELAPSE_TIME are reported for the monitoring view. Once the output OC_STR is FALSE, the outputs OC_TIME and ELAPSE_TIME are reset. The module can be reset by the input RESET_OC. If the input RESET_OC is TRUE, the outputs OC_OPR, OC_TIME and ELAPSE_TIME are reset. The different ANSI/IEC curve type operating time characteristic depends on the Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D, Curve parameter E, Time multiplier, Operating curve type, Operate delay time and Minimum operate time settings. Similarly, the reset curve functionality depends on the Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These per unit values are relational to the certain base values. The PML630 IED supports alternative base value groups in the Base value Sel phase setting, for example Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp 3. The output INVAL_CRV is TRUE if the Operating curve type setting is selected Programmable and the curve parameter values are invalid, else the output INVAL_CRV is FALSE. For more information on overcurrent start and operate based on different Timer characteristics and relevant inputs, see the PHLPTOC function of the three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC in the 630 series technical manual.

For a detailed description of the definite time characteristics and current based inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristics, see the general function block features section in this manual.

The overcurrent settings in PML630 must be coordinated carefully with the IED of the power source.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

207

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

The external slow load-shedding trigger is also initiated if the input EXT_OC_SLST changes from FALSE to TRUE. This module inhibits the OC_STR and OC_OPR outputs and slow load-shedding trigger due to external input in any of the following conditions. The input INHIBIT_TRG is TRUE. The input SLS_DISABLE is TRUE. The load-shedding blocking status (from the Block logic module) is TRUE.

If the Over current based load shed module is disabled, the outputs OC_OPR and OC_STR are FALSE, the Slow load shed trigger module due to external input EXT_OC_SLST is inactive and the outputs OC_TIME and ELAPSE_TIME are zero. The Over current based load shed module provides the OC_STR (overcurrent start) signal to the Slow load shed logic module. It also provides the OC_OPR (overcurrent operate), external slow load-shedding trigger signal to the Slow load shed logic module and the Binary to integer module.

7.4.4.7

Demand based load shed

This module calculates the linear average demand based on an active power (from the Power monitoring module) of the power source over a set interval time. Based on the comparison of the linear average demand and set maximum demand value of source, demand-based slow load-shedding action is initiated. The Slow load shed mode setting enables or disables the Demand based load shed module. If the Slow load shed mode setting is "Max Dmd Trg" or "OC, Max Dmd, Ext Trg", the Demand based load shed is enabled, else it is disabled Based on the measured powers (power received from source IED), the Demand based load shed module internally calculates the linear average of the demand over the Demand interval setting. The Demand interval setting can be set to "1 Minute", "5 Minute", "10 Minute", "15 Minute", "30 Minute", "60 Minute" or "180 Minute". A new demand value is obtained every one minute, indicating the actual demand over the time interval preceding the update time. Based on the sliding average and final output value, the demand values are updated at the end of the time interval. For monitoring, the demand value output is AVG_DEMAND in kilowatt and the energy demand output is PERIODIC_KWH in kilowatt hour. For example, the demand value based on the setting interval "180 Minute" is displayed in the output for the first time after 180 minutes and the value is calculated from the interval t0 t180. The next value is displayed at the t180+1 and it is based on the average between t0+1 t180+1. If the linear average of the demand on the power source exceeds the Maximum demand setting limit, the MAX_DMD_ALM output (maximum demand operate) is TRUE. The RESET_DEMAND input resets the Demand based load-shedding

208

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

module. If the RESET_DEMAND input is TRUE, the MAX_DMD_ALM output is TRUE and both the AVG_DEMAND and PERIODIC_KWH outputs are reset to zero.
P2 Active power P1

Linear average demand

P2 Ps P1

MAX_DMD_ALM

3 Time( in minutes)

GUID-82319A07-E887-4BCA-8FCA-5C03F4A033CC V1 EN

Figure 121:

Maximum demand scenario-1

P1 Active power P2

Linear average demand

P1 Ps P2

MAX_DMD_ALM 1 2 3 Time(in minutes)

GUID-6141637E-30D7-4056-8A37-C51B9942606F V1 EN

Figure 122:

Maximum demand scenario-2

Where
P1 Ps P2 First active power value

Maximum demand setting

Second active power value

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

209

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Depending on the instant of change of the input power P1 to P2 as shown in Figure 121 and Figure 122, the maximum demand trigger can be activated either at minute 2 of the maximum demand scenario 1 or at minute 3 of the maximum demand scenario 2. This module inhibits MAX_DMD_ALM output in any of the following conditions. The input INHIBIT_TRG is TRUE. The input SLS_DISABLE is TRUE. The load-shedding blocking status (from the Block logic module) is TRUE.

If the Demand based load shed module is disabled, MAX_DMD_ALM is FALSE, and the AVG_DEMAND and PERIODIC_KWH outputs are zero. This module provides the MAX_DMD_ALM to Slow load shed logic module and Binary to integer module.

7.4.4.8

Slow load shed logic

This module calculates the available power, active power, slow load-shedding start, slow load-shedding trigger and slow load trigger inhibition signals. The Slow load shed logic module also calculates the overload amount during the overloading of the power source. If the load-shedding blocking status is TRUE due to bad IED quality in the circuit breaker open position and the Bypass block setting is Quality bad CB open, the outputs AVA_POWER and ACTIVE_POWER are zero, else the outputs are the same as the available power and active power calculated in the Power monitoring module. The slow load shed start and slow load-shedding trigger signals are activated based on various conditions, provided active power of the power source is positive. If the active power value is negative, the slow load-shed start and slow load-shedding trigger signals remain inactive. The slow load-shedding start is activated if any of the following conditions satisfy. The OC_STR output is TRUE. The MAX_DMD_ALM output is TRUE. The external slow load-shedding trigger changes from FALSE to TRUE.

The slow load-shedding trigger is activated if any of the following conditions satisfy. The OC_OPR output is TRUE. The MAX_DMD_ALM output is TRUE. The external slow load-shedding trigger changes from FALSE to TRUE.

The slow load-shedding trigger is provided by the SLOWLS_OPR output.

210

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

If the SLOWLS_OPR output is TRUE, the AVA_POWER output is the same as the Ava power SLS Trg setting, else the AVA_POWER output remains the same as calculated above. The slow load-shedding trigger is inhibited due to any of the following conditions. The INHIBIT_TRG input is TRUE. The SLS_DISABLE input is TRUE. The load-shedding blocking status is TRUE. The Slow load shed mode setting is Disable.

The Slow load shed logic module calculates the overload amount of the power source as the difference of the active power (from the Power monitoring module) and the Ava power SLS Trg setting. For monitoring view, the OVLOD_AMOUNT output provides the calculated overload amount. The OVLOD_AMOUNT output is zero when the active power value is less than the Ava power SLS Trg setting or the active power value is negative. The Slow load shed logic module can handle the slow loadshedding based on the overloading of the power source by the En Ov load Amnt shed setting set to Yes. The slow load-shedding based on the overloading of the power source can be disabled by the En Ov load Amnt shed setting set to No and the OVLOD_AMOUNT output set to zero. For monitoring view, the SLOWLS_MODE output provides the enabled or the disabled status of the Slow load shed logic module. The slow load shed mode indicates if the slow load-shedding is disabled or enabled due to overcurrent based load shed or demand based load shed. The slow load shed mode is provided by the SLOWLS_MODE output. The SLOWLS_MODE output is "Disable" if any of the following condition satisfy. The INHIBIT_TRG input is TRUE. The SLS_DISABLE input is TRUE. The Load-shedding blocking status is TRUE. The Slow load shed mode setting is Disable.

The SLOWLS_MODE output is OC & Ext Trg if the Slow load shed mode setting is OC & Ext Trg. Similarly, the SLOWLS_MODE output is Max Dmd Trg if the Slow load shed mode setting is Max Dmd Trg. The SLOWLS_MODE output is OC, Max Dmd, Ext Trg if the Slow load shed mode setting is OC, Max Dmd, Ext Trg. If the SLOWLS_MODE is Disable, the output SLOWLS_OPR, slow load-shedding start and slow load trigger inhibition signals are FALSE and the output OVLOD_AMOUNT is zero.
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 211

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

The outputs AVA_POWER and ACTIVE_POWER are reported for the monitoring view. The ACTIVE_POWER (active power), slow load-shedding start and slow load trigger inhibition signals are reported to the Binary to Integer module.

7.4.4.9

Binary to integer module

The DATA_SOURCE output provides the load-shedding data for the power source. The data is also available in the monitoring view. The DATA_SOURCE output consists of various binary information as shown in Table 235. Based on the Source configure setting, the Binary to integer module calculates the power source configuration status. If the Source configure setting is set to Generator, the power source configuration status is FALSE. If the Source configure setting is set to External source, the power source configuration status is TRUE. If the ACTIVE_POWER output is positive, the overcurrent operation status, maximum demand operation status and external slow load-shedding trigger remain same as received from the respective modules. If the ACTIVE_POWER output is negative, the overcurrent operation status, maximum demand operation status and external slow load-shedding trigger are FALSE. If the CB_COMPS_POS output is Close, the compensated circuit breaker close status is TRUE, else compensated circuit breaker close status is FALSE. If the CB_COMPS_POS output is Open and FLS_TRIGGER is TRUE, the compensated circuit breaker open status is FALSE. Irrespective of the CB_COMPS_POS output, the compensated circuit breaker open status is TRUE if the FLS_TRIGGER is FALSE.
Table 235:
Bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATA_SOURCE bits information

Short name of signal SOURCE_CONFIG COMP_CB_CLS FLS_TRIGGER FLS_BLOCK ISLAND_PARALL OC_OPR SLOWLS_STR MAX_DMD_ALM Source configuration Compensated CB closed status Fast load-shedding trigger Fast load-shed block Island parallel status Overcurrent operating status Slow load-shed start Maximum demand operating status

Bit Description

Table continues on next page

212

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Bits 9 10 11 Bit Description Slow load trigger inhibit status External slow load-shedding trigger Compensated CB open status Short name of signal SLS_TRG_BLK EXT_SLOW_TRG COMP_CB_OPN

The Busbar number setting sets the power source load busbar number (BB_NUMBER). The group output SOURCE consists of signals for respective power source which are provided to the NPMMXU function.
Table 236:
Signal description

The group signals for SOURCE

Group signal SOURCE Signal short name for power source instance < n> Bit 1 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 2 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 3 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 4 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 5 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 6 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 7 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 8 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 9 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 10 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 11 of DATA_SOURCE AVA_POWER ACTIVE_POWER GOV_MODE OVLOD_AMOUNT BB_NUMBER CONFIG_SRC <n> CCB_CLS_SRC <n> FLS_TRG_SRC <n> FLS_BLK_SRC <n> ISD_PAR_SRC <n> OC_OPR_SRC <n> SLS_STR_SRC <n> MAX_DMD_SRC <n> SLS_INH_SRC <n> EXT_SLT_SRC <n> CCB_OPN_SRC <n> AVA_POWER_SRC <n> ACT_POWER_SRC <n> GOV_MODE_SRC <n> OVLOD_SRC <n> BB_NUM_SRC <n>

Configuration status for power source Compensated CB close status for power source Fast load shed trigger for power source Fast load shed blocking for power source Island parallel status for power source Over current operate status for power source Slow load shed start for power source Maximum demand operate status for power source Slow load trigger inhibit status for power source External slow load shed trigger for power source Compensated CB open status for power source Available power of power source Active power of power source Governor mode of generator Overload amount of power source Busbar number of power source

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

213

Section 7 Power management functions 7.4.5 Signals

Table 237:
Name I_A I_B I_C POWER CB_POSITION CB_SERVICE CB_LOCK_OUT CB_IED_QVAL IED_TST_MODE MAX_POWER GOVERNOR_MOD AP_GOV_QVAL ISLAND_PARAL ENA_MULT EXT_OC_SLST INHIBIT_TRG SLS_DISABLE RESET_OC RESET_DEMAND

1MRS757256 D

PSCSWI Input signals

Type REAL REAL REAL REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0 0 1 0 0.0 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Phase A RMS current of power source Phase B RMS current of power source Phase C RMS current of power source Active power from power source Circuit breaker position of source Circuit breaker service position of power source Circuit breaker lockout status of power source Circuit breaker IED quality status of power source IED test mode behaviour of power source Available power of power source on communication Governor mode of generator on communication Quality status of available power and governor mode on comm Island or parallel mode for external power source Enable signal for current multiplier External slow load shed trigger for power source Inhibit the trigger from power source Slow load shed disable of power source Reset for over current Reset for maximum demand

Table 238:
Name SOURCE

PSCSWI Output signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL INTEGER REAL REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Group signal of power source Circuit breaker position of power source Active power of power source Available power of power source Fast load shed trigger from power source Slow load shed trigger from power source Over current start of power source Over current operate status of power source Max demand operate alarm for power source Island or parallel mode status of external source Fast load shed block from power source Block is bypassed One or many basic setting change Invalid curve parameters PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

CB_COMPS_POS ACTIVE_POWER AVA_POWER FLS_TRIGGER SLOWLS_OPR OC_STR OC_OPR MAX_DMD_ALM ISLND_PARALL FLS_BLOCK BLK_BYPASS B_SET_CHANGE INVAL_CRV 214

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions Settings

PSCSWI Group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 0.05 - 5.00 0.8 - 10.0 0.05 - 15.00 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.04 - 200.00 Unit pu Step 0.01 0.1 0.05 Default 0.05 1.0 1.00 IEC Def. Time Description Start value Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI curves Selection of time delay curve type

7.4.6
Table 239:
Name Start value Start value Mult Time multiplier Operating curve type

Operate delay time

0.01

0.04

Operate delay time

Table 240:
Name

PSCSWI Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Immediate Def time reset Inverse reset Unit Step Default Immediate Description Selection of reset curve type

Type of reset curve

Table 241:
Name Block override

PSCSWI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range) No IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open CB Interm or invalid All yes 0.0 - 999999.9 Droop MW ISO P-Control Optimize Base load Peak load Unit Step Default No Description Bypass block due to IED test or data quality or CB position

Maximum Ava power Governor mode

kW -

0.1 -

0.0 ISO

Maximum available power of power source Governor mode of generator

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

215

Section 7 Power management functions

Name Slow load shed mode Values (Range) Disable OC & Ext Trg Max Dmd Trg OC, Max Dmd, Ext Trg 0.0 - 999999.9 0.0 - 999999.9 Unit Step Default Disable Description

1MRS757256 D

Enable slow load shed trigger of power source

Maximum power SLS Maximum demand

kW kW

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0

Maximum power of source during slow load trigger Maximum power demand of power source

Table 242:
Name Source configure Busbar number

PSCSWI Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) External source Generator Source Not Configure Load Bus Bar 1 Load Bus Bar 2 Load Bus Bar 3 Load Bus Bar 4 0 - 500 Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW Set Max Ava power Set Ava Pow relative Comm Max Ava power Comm spin reserve 100.00 - 400.00 Disable Enable 1 Min 5 Mins 10 Mins 15 Mins 30 Mins 60 Mins 180 Mins No Yes Pow & Ava Pow No Chg Pow & Ava Pow Zero Phase Grp 1 Phase Grp 2 Phase Grp 3 Unit Step Default External source Source Not Configure Description Source type configure as generator or external source Load bus bar number of power source

CB Interm time Power convention

ms -

10 -

200 Positive W

Circuit breaker intermediate time IED power unit and sign convention of source

Ava power mode

Set Max Ava power

Available power mode selection

Ava power relative Enable Comm Gov mode Demand interval

% -

1.00 -

100.00 Disable 15 Min

Available power as percentage of active power Enable governor mode of generator on communication Time interval for energy calculation

En Ov load Amnt shed Power Cfg export Mod

No Pow & Ava Pow No Chg

Enable overload amount based slow load trigger Power configuration during power flow direction negative

Base value Sel phase

Phase Grp 1

Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups

Table continues on next page

216

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Values (Range) 0.0086 - 120.0000 0.0000 - 0.7120 0.02 - 2.00 0.46 - 30.00 0.0 - 1.0 0.000 - 60.000 0.040 - 60.000 Unit s s Step 0.0001 0.0001 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default 28.2000 0.1217 2.00 29.10 1.0 0.020 0.040 Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve Parameter B for customer programmable curve Parameter C for customer programmable curve Parameter D for customer programmable curve Parameter E for customer programmable curve Reset delay time Minimum operate time for IEC/ANSI curves

Name Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D Curve parameter E Reset delay time Minimum operate time

7.4.7

Measured values
Table 243:
Name I_A I_B I_C POWER CB_POSITION CB_SERVICE CB_LOCK_OUT CB_IED_QVAL IED_TST_MODE MAX_POWER GOVERNOR_MOD AP_GOV_QVAL ISLAND_PARAL ENA_MULT EXT_OC_SLST INHIBIT_TRG SLS_DISABLE RESET_OC RESET_DEMAND

PSCSWI Measured values

Type REAL REAL REAL REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0 0 1 0 0.0 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Phase A RMS current of power source Phase B RMS current of power source Phase C RMS current of power source Active power from power source Circuit breaker position of source Circuit breaker service position of power source Circuit breaker lockout status of power source Circuit breaker IED quality status of power source IED test mode behaviour of power source Available power of power source on communication Governor mode of generator on communication Quality status of available power and governor mode on comm Island or parallel mode for external power source Enable signal for current multiplier External slow load shed trigger for power source Inhibit the trigger from power source Slow load shed disable of power source Reset for over current Reset for maximum demand

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

217

Section 7 Power management functions 7.4.8 Monitored data

Table 244:
Name DATA_SOURCE CB_COMPS_POS ACTIVE_POWER AVA_POWER GOV_MODE

1MRS757256 D

PSCSWI Monitored data

Type INTEGER INTEGER REAL REAL INTEGER Values (Range) 1=Open 2=Close 1=Droop 2=MW 3=ISO 4=P-Control 5=Optimize 6=Base load 7=Peak load 0=Not applicable Unit kW kW Description Load shed data for power source Circuit breaker position of power source Active power of power source Available power of power source Governor mode of generator

AVG_DEMAND

REAL

kW

Average demand over set interval of power source Periodic energy at demand interval of power source Maximum of three phase current of power source Overload amount during slow load trigger Pick up value for over current start of power source Elapse time after overcurrent start Time require for over current operate Enable or disable signal for curr and demand based load shed

PERIODIC_KWH

REAL

kWh

MAX_CURRENT OVLOD_AMOUNT PICKUP

REAL REAL REAL

A kW -

ELAPSE_TIME OC_TIME SLOWLS_MODE

REAL REAL INTEGER

1=Disable 2=OC & Ext Trg 3=Max Dmd Trg 4=OC, Max Dmd, Ext Trg 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE

s s -

FLS_TRIGGER SLOWLS_OPR OC_STR OC_OPR MAX_DMD_ALM

BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN

Fast load shed trigger from power source Slow load shed trigger from power source Over current start of power source Over current operate status of power source Max demand operate alarm for power source

Table continues on next page

218

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name ISLND_PARALL FLS_BLOCK BLK_BYPASS B_SET_CHANGE INVAL_CRV Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Values (Range) 1=Parallel 0=Island 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit Description Island or parallel mode status of external source Fast load shed block from power source Block is bypassed One or many basic setting change Invalid curve parameters

7.4.9

Technical data
Table 245:
Characteristic Operation accuracy

PSCSWI technical data

Details Value At the frequency f = fn 1.5% of the set value or 0.002 In IFault = 2 set Start value Typical: 23 ms (15 ms) <45 ms Typical 0.96 <30 ms 1.0% of the set value or 20 ms 5.0% of the theoretical value or 20 ms3)

Start time1)2) Reset time Reset ratio Retardation time Operate time accuracy in definite time mode Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode

1) Current before fault = 0.0 In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact 3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20

7.5
7.5.1

Load busbar monitoring LDMMXU

Identification
Function description Load busbar monitoring IEC 61850 identification LDMMXU IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification LDMMXU

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

219

Section 7 Power management functions 7.5.2 Function block

LDMMXU POWER_L1 CB_POS_L1 IED_QVAL_L1 IED_TEST_L1 EXT_INH_L1 POWER_L2 CB_POS_L2 IED_QVAL_L2 IED_TEST_L2 EXT_INH_L2 POWER_L3 CB_POS_L3 IED_QVAL_L3 IED_TEST_L3 EXT_INH_L3 POWER_L4 CB_POS_L4 IED_QVAL_L4 IED_TEST_L4 EXT_INH_L4 POWER_L5 CB_POS_L5 IED_QVAL_L5 IED_TEST_L5 EXT_INH_L5 POWER_L6 CB_POS_L6 IED_QVAL_L6 IED_TEST_L6 EXT_INH_L6 POWER_L7 CB_POS_L7 IED_QVAL_L7 IED_TEST_L7 EXT_INH_L7 POWER_L8 CB_POS_L8 IED_QVAL_L8 IED_TEST_L8 EXT_INH_L8 POWER_L9 CB_POS_L9 IED_QVAL_L9 IED_TEST_L9 EXT_INH_L9 POWER_L10 CB_POS_L10 IED_QVAL_L10 IED_TEST_L10 EXT_INH_L10
GUID-EA28791D-52AF-4642-8F46-9E412A094E47 V2 EN

1MRS757256 D

BB L1_CB_COMPS L2_CB_COMPS L3_CB_COMPS L4_CB_COMPS L5_CB_COMPS L6_CB_COMPS L7_CB_COMPS L8_CB_COMPS L9_CB_COMPS L10_CB_COMPS B_SET_CHANGE

Figure 123:

Function block

7.5.3

Functionality
Load busbar monitoring LDMMXU function calculates the compensated CB status and load-shedding inhibit status for individual sheddable loads. The load-shedding

220

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

priority or inhibit status and power value of each sheddable load is reported to LSCACLS for load-shedding action.

7.5.4

Operation principle
The operation of LDMMXU can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
L1_POWER POWER_L1 POWER_L2

Power monitoring

L2_POWER

L10_POWER

BB

POWER_L10 PRIO_L1_5 PRIO_L6_10 CB_POS_L1 CB_POS_L2

Compensated CB status

L1_CB_COMPS L2_CB_COMPS

CB_POS_L10 IED_QVAL_L1 IED_QVAL_L2

L10_CB_COMPS

IED_QVAL_L10 IED_TEST_L1 IED_TEST_L2

Shed priority logic Load inhibit logic

B_SET_CHANGE

IED_TEST_L10 EXT_INH_L1 EXT_INH_L2

EXT_INH_L10
GUID-ECECA829-6E15-4C50-99FC-8728782F466E V2 EN

Figure 124:

Functional module diagram

The Power monitoring, Compensated CB status and Load inhibit logic modules are identical for sheddable load1 to sheddable load10. Hence, the logic explained in these modules for sheddable load1 also applies to sheddable load2, sheddable load3 and so on.

7.5.4.1

Power monitoring
This module converts the units of the POWER_L1 input (sheddable load1 active power) in kW as the Power convention L1 setting. The L1_POWER output is provided for monitoring view.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

221

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 246:
W kW MW

Unit conversion of power for the sheddable load1

Input POWER_L1 POWER_L1 POWER_L1 L1_POWER output POWER_L1 [0.001] POWER_L1 [1] POWER_L1 [1000]

Power convention L1 setting

7.5.4.2

Compensated CB status
This module calculates the compensated CB status for sheddable load1. The L1_CB_COMPS output provides the compensated CB status for sheddable load1. The conditions to set the L1_CB_COMPS output as "Close". The input CB_POS_L1 (sheddable load1 circuit breaker position) is "Close". The input IED_QVAL_L1 (sheddable load1 IED data quality) is Good.

When either of the above conditions are not met, L1_CB_COMPS output is "Open".

7.5.4.3

Load inhibit logic

The sheddable load1 can be inhibited by an operator based on the Inhibit L1 setting. The sheddable load1 can be inhibited by a system based on various conditions as shown in the Table 247. If the sheddable load1 is not inhibited by the system or operator, the L1_INHIBIT output is "Not Inhibit".

Table 247:

Calculation of the L1_INHIBIT output

L1_INHIBIT = Operator Inhibit
A 1 0 1 0
GUID-841986AB-BA79-48C4-876B-C0B6E2E49437 V1 EN

Cause of inhibition of sheddable load L1_INHIBIT output A = setting Inhibit L1 is Active A= input CB_POS_L1 is Open and input POWER_L1 0 (within measurement cycle)

2T

3T

4T

5T

L1_INHIBIT

L1_INHIBIT = Not Inhibit A = input CB_POS_L1 is Open and input POWER_L1 0 (at measurement cycle)
At the instance of measurement cycle

1 A 0 T 2T 3T 4T 5T

1
L1_INHIBIT

0
L1_INHIBIT=System inhibit
GUID-DFDD737D-2B49-4600-A837-8237CF18C804 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

222

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Cause of inhibition of sheddable load L1_INHIBIT output A = input IED_QVAL_L1 is Bad (within measurement cycle)
1
A

2T

3T

4T

5T

1
L1_INHIBIT

0
L1_INHIBIT=System inhibit

GUID-8449C37E-29B5-4EEF-A469-85ACDDAD2EFD V1 EN

A = input IED_QVAL_L1 is Bad (at measurement cycle)

A

1 0 0 T 2T 3T 4T 5T

1
L1_INHIBIT

0
L1_INHIBIT=System inhibit

GUID-B33FD3AD-5E3A-494F-AA05-CDB4556CA3C1 V1 EN

A = input IED_TEST_L1 is TRUE or input EXT_INH_L1 is TRUE or input CB_POS_L1 is Intermediate or Invalid

L1_INHIBIT = System Inhibit

T, 2T, 3T are the measurement cycles.

If the sheddable load1 is inhibited by the system and operator at the same time, the output L1_INHIBIT is "Operator Inhibit". The calculated L1_INHIBIT output is available for the monitoring view and reported to the Shed priority logic module.

7.5.4.4

Shed priority logic

This module calculates the shed priority of a sheddable load based on the system or operator inhibition. The Priority L1 setting sets the priority of the sheddable load1. The Priority L1 value ranges from 1 to 19, where 1 is the lowest important sheddable load and 19 is the highest important sheddable load. The priority setting is also available as the L1_SHED_PRIO output for the monitoring view. The priority setting is effective only if the sheddable load is not inhibited by the system or operator. The priorities of the sheddable load1...5 can be monitored as output PRIO_L1_5 and sheddable load6...10 can be monitored as output PRIO_L6_10 coded integer (32 bit) form. Each sheddable load priority is represented by 5-bit information as shown in Table 248.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

223

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 248:
Bits 1...5 6...10 11...15 16...20 21...25

PRIO_L1_5 bits information

Bits description Sheddable load1 priority Sheddable load2 priority Sheddable load3 priority Sheddable load4 priority Sheddable load5 priority

Similarly, the priority for each sheddable load that is sheddable load6...10 is represented by consecutive five bits of PRIO_L6_L10. The output B_SET_CHANGE remains active for 500 ms if one or more basic settings are changed. After 500 ms, the output B_SET_CHANGE is FALSE. The group output BB consists of signals for ten sheddable loads which are provided to the LSCACLS function.
Table 249:
Signal description Active power of sheddable load1 to sheddable load10 Shed priority data of sheddable loads 1...5 Shed priority data of sheddable loads 6...10

Group signals for BB

Group signal BB L1_POWER to L10_POWER PRIO_L1_5 PRIO_L6_10

7.5.5

Signals
Table 250:
Name POWER_L1 CB_POS_L1 IED_QVAL_L1 IED_TEST_L1 EXT_INH_L1 POWER_L2 CB_POS_L2 IED_QVAL_L2 IED_TEST_L2 EXT_INH_L2 POWER_L3

LDMMXU Input signals

Type REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Default 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 Description Active power of sheddable load1 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load1 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load1 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load1 External inhibit of sheddable load1 Active power of sheddable load2 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load2 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load2 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load2 External inhibit of sheddable load2 Active power of sheddable load3

Table continues on next page 224 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name CB_POS_L3 IED_QVAL_L3 IED_TEST_L3 EXT_INH_L3 POWER_L4 CB_POS_L4 IED_QVAL_L4 IED_TEST_L4 EXT_INH_L4 POWER_L5 CB_POS_L5 IED_QVAL_L5 IED_TEST_L5 EXT_INH_L5 POWER_L6 CB_POS_L6 IED_QVAL_L6 IED_TEST_L6 EXT_INH_L6 POWER_L7 CB_POS_L7 IED_QVAL_L7 IED_TEST_L7 EXT_INH_L7 POWER_L8 CB_POS_L8 IED_QVAL_L8 IED_TEST_L8 EXT_INH_L8 POWER_L9 CB_POS_L9 IED_QVAL_L9 IED_TEST_L9 EXT_INH_L9 POWER_L10 Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL Default 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 Description Circuit breaker position of sheddable load3 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load3 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load3 External inhibit of sheddable load3 Active power of sheddable load4 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load4 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load4 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load4 External inhibit of sheddable load4 Active power of sheddable load5 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load5 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load5 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load5 External inhibit of sheddable load5 Active power of sheddable load6 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load6 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load6 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load6 External inhibit of sheddable load6 Active power of sheddable load7 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load7 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load7 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load7 External inhibit of sheddable load7 Active power of sheddable load8 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load8 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load8 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load8 External inhibit of sheddable load8 Active power of sheddable load9 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load9 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load9 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load9 External inhibit of sheddable load9 Active power of sheddable load10

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

225

Section 7 Power management functions

Name CB_POS_L10 IED_QVAL_L10 IED_TEST_L10 EXT_INH_L10 Type INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 1 1 0 0 Description

1MRS757256 D

Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load10 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load10 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load10 External inhibit of sheddable load10

Table 251:
Name BB L1_POWER L1_CB_COMPS L2_POWER L2_CB_COMPS L3_POWER L3_CB_COMPS L4_POWER L4_CB_COMPS L5_POWER L5_CB_COMPS L6_POWER L6_CB_COMPS L7_POWER L7_CB_COMPS L8_POWER L8_CB_COMPS L9_POWER L9_CB_COMPS L10_POWER L10_CB_COMPS B_SET_CHANGE

LDMMXU Output signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN Description Group signal of sheddable loads Active power of the sheddable load1 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load1 Active power of the sheddable load2 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load2 Active power of the sheddable load3 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load3 Active power of sheddable load4 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load4 Active power of the sheddable load5 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load5 Active power of the sheddable load6 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load6 Active power of the sheddable load7 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load7 Active power of the sheddable load8 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load8 Active power of the sheddable load9 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load9 Active power of the sheddable load10 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load10 One or many basic settings change

7.5.6
Table 252:
Name Priority L1 Priority L2 Priority L3 Priority L4

Settings
LDMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 Unit Step 1 1 1 1 Default 19 19 19 19 Description Load shed priority of sheddable load1 Load shed priority of sheddable load2 Load shed priority of sheddable load3 Load shed priority of sheddable load4

Table continues on next page 226 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Values (Range) 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Unit Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 19 19 19 19 19 19 Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Description Load shed priority of sheddable load5 Load shed priority of sheddable load6 Load shed priority of sheddable load7 Load shed priority of sheddable load8 Load shed priority of sheddable load9 Load shed priority of sheddable load10 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load1 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load2 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load3 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load4 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load5 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load6 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load7 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load8 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load9 Load shed inhibit for sheddable load10

Name Priority L5 Priority L6 Priority L7 Priority L8 Priority L9 Priority L10 Inhibit L1 Inhibit L2 Inhibit L3 Inhibit L4 Inhibit L5 Inhibit L6 Inhibit L7 Inhibit L8 Inhibit L9 Inhibit L10

Table 253:
Name Power unit L1

LDMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) MW kW W MW kW W MW kW W MW kW W MW kW W MW kW W Unit Step Default W Description Power unit for sheddable load1

Power unit L2

Power unit for sheddable load2

Power unit L3

Power unit for sheddable load3

Power unit L4

Power unit for sheddable load4

Power unit L5

Power unit for sheddable load5

Power unit L6

Power unit for sheddable load6

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

227

Section 7 Power management functions

Name Power unit L7 Values (Range) MW kW W MW kW W MW kW W MW kW W Unit Step Default W Description

1MRS757256 D

Power unit for sheddable load7

Power unit L8

Power unit for sheddable load8

Power unit L9

Power unit for sheddable load9

Power unit L10

Power unit for sheddable load10

7.5.7

Measured values
Table 254:
Name POWER_L1 CB_POS_L1 IED_QVAL_L1 IED_TEST_L1 EXT_INH_L1 POWER_L2 CB_POS_L2 IED_QVAL_L2 IED_TEST_L2 EXT_INH_L2 POWER_L3 CB_POS_L3 IED_QVAL_L3 IED_TEST_L3 EXT_INH_L3 POWER_L4 CB_POS_L4 IED_QVAL_L4 IED_TEST_L4 EXT_INH_L4 POWER_L5 CB_POS_L5

LDMMXU Measured values

Type REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER Default 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 Description Active power of sheddable load1 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load1 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load1 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load1 External inhibit of sheddable load1 Active power of sheddable load2 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load2 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load2 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load2 External inhibit of sheddable load2 Active power of sheddable load3 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load3 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load3 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load3 External inhibit of sheddable load3 Active power of sheddable load4 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load4 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load4 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load4 External inhibit of sheddable load4 Active power of sheddable load5 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load5

Table continues on next page

228

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name IED_QVAL_L5 IED_TEST_L5 EXT_INH_L5 POWER_L6 CB_POS_L6 IED_QVAL_L6 IED_TEST_L6 EXT_INH_L6 POWER_L7 CB_POS_L7 IED_QVAL_L7 IED_TEST_L7 EXT_INH_L7 POWER_L8 CB_POS_L8 IED_QVAL_L8 IED_TEST_L8 EXT_INH_L8 POWER_L9 CB_POS_L9 IED_QVAL_L9 IED_TEST_L9 EXT_INH_L9 POWER_L10 CB_POS_L10 IED_QVAL_L10 IED_TEST_L10 EXT_INH_L10 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 0.0 1 1 0 0 Description Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load5 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load5 External inhibit of sheddable load5 Active power of sheddable load6 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load6 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load6 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load6 External inhibit of sheddable load6 Active power of sheddable load7 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load7 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load7 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load7 External inhibit of sheddable load7 Active power of sheddable load8 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load8 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load8 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load8 External inhibit of sheddable load8 Active power of sheddable load9 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load9 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load9 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load9 External inhibit of sheddable load9 Active power of sheddable load10 Circuit breaker position of the sheddable load10 Circuit breaker IED quality status of sheddable load10 IED test mode behaviour of sheddable load10 External inhibit of sheddable load10

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

229

Section 7 Power management functions 7.5.8 Monitored Data

Table 255:
Name L1_POWER L1_CB_COMPS L1_SHED_PRIO L1_INHIBIT

1MRS757256 D

LDMMXU Monitored data

Type REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Values (Range) 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close Unit kW Description Active power of the sheddable load1 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load1 Shed priority of sheddable load1 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load1

L2_POWER L2_CB_COMPS L2_SHED_PRIO L2_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load2 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load2 Shed priority of sheddable load2 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load2

L3_POWER L3_CB_COMPS L3_SHED_PRIO L3_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load3 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load3 Shed priority of sheddable load3 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load3

L4_POWER L4_CB_COMPS L4_SHED_PRIO L4_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of sheddable load4 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load4 Shed priority of sheddable load4 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load4

L5_POWER L5_CB_COMPS L5_SHED_PRIO

REAL INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load5 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load5 Shed priority of sheddable load5

Table continues on next page

230

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name L5_INHIBIT Type INTEGER Values (Range) 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 1=Open 2=Close Unit Description Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load5

L6_POWER L6_CB_COMPS L6_SHED_PRIO L6_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load6 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load6 Shed priority of sheddable load6 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load6

L7_POWER L7_CB_COMPS L7_SHED_PRIO L7_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load7 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load7 Shed priority of sheddable load7 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load7

L8_POWER L8_CB_COMPS L8_SHED_PRIO L8_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load8 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load8 Shed priority of sheddable load8 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load8

L9_POWER L9_CB_COMPS L9_SHED_PRIO L9_INHIBIT

REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load9 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load9 Shed priority of sheddable load9 Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load9

L10_POWER L10_CB_COMPS L10_SHED_PRIO

REAL INTEGER INTEGER

kW -

Active power of the sheddable load10 Circuit breaker position of sheddable load10 Shed priority of sheddable load10

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

231

Section 7 Power management functions

Name L10_INHIBIT Type INTEGER Values (Range) 2=System Inhibit 0=Not Inhibit 1=Operator Inhibit 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit -

1MRS757256 D

Description Load shedding inhibit status of sheddable load10 One or many basic settings change Shed priority data of sheddable loads 1 to 5 Shed priority data of sheddable loads 6 to 10

B_SET_CHANGE PRIO_L1_5 PRIO_L6_10

BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER

7.6
7.6.1

Network circuit breaker NCBDCSWI

Identification
Function description Network circuit breaker IEC 61850 identification NCBDCSWI IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification NCBDCSWI

7.6.2

Function block
NCBDCSWI SND_CB_POWER SND_CB_POS SND_CB_SER SND_CB_L_OUT SND_IED_QVAL SND_IED_TEST RCV_CB_POWER RCV_CB_POS RCV_CB_SER RCV_CB_L_OUT RCV_IED_QVAL RCV_IED_TEST INHIBIT_TRG NW_CB CB_COMPS_POS VIRTUAL_CB BLK_BYPASS B_SET_CHANGE FLS_BLOCK FLS_TRIGGER

GUID-F049E6D8-0025-47F7-B903-D93897939C6C V2 EN

Figure 125:

Function block

7.6.3

Functionality
The network circuit breaker function NCBDCSWI is the input interface for bus coupler or tie feeder circuit breaker. It can be configured for either bus coupler or tie circuit breakers connecting two busbars. This function can also be configured as virtual circuit breaker when two busbars are permanently connected to each other. Based on the various inputs and type of network circuit breaker configuration, it

232

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

calculates the active power, fast load-shedding trigger, fast load-shedding block and compensated CB status. It has the provision to bypass the fast load-shedding block caused by various conditions. It reports the load-shedding data and active power of network circuit breaker to LSCACLS for load-shedding action.

7.6.4

Operation principle
The operation of NCBDCSWI can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
SND_CB_POWER RCV_CB_POWER
Power monitoring

VIRTUAL_CB

SND_IED_TEST RCV_IED_TEST SND_IED_QVAL RCV_IED_QVAL

General logic Block logic

CB_POWER

B_SET_CHANGE BLK_BYPASS FLS_BLOCK

NW_CB Binary to integer

NW_CB_DATA

SND_CB_SER SND_CB_L_OUT RCV_CB_SER RCV_CB_L_OUT

Compensated CB status

CB_COMPS_POS

SND_CB_POS RCV_CB_POS INHIBIT_TRG

GUID-B7741267-1F69-4FCB-A8D3-68C7DFB0717F V2 EN

FLS trigger logic

FLS_TRIGGER

Figure 126:

Functional module diagram

7.6.4.1

Power monitoring
Based on the network circuit breaker configuration, NCBDCSWI can be configured for a bus coupler or tie circuit breaker. If one network circuit breaker is connected in a busbar configuration as shown in Figure 127, the CB configuration setting is set to Bus coupler. If two network circuit breakers are connected in a busbar configuration as shown in Figure 128, the CB configuration setting is set to Tie breaker.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

233

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Bus bar

Bus bar

Sending end circuit breaker

GUID-A6CA8B40-4791-4E4E-93B7-1C73D8B82943 V2 EN

Figure 127:

Bus coupler configuration

Bus bar

Sending end circuit breaker

Receiving end circuit breaker

Bus bar
GUID-96DFC4D7-7235-411B-A843-15A2922DE558 V2 EN

Figure 128:

Tie circuit breaker configuration

This module converts the units of SND_CB_POWER (sending-end circuit breaker power) and RCV_CB_POWER (receiving-end circuit breaker power) inputs in kW based on the Send Pow convention and Rcv Pow convention settings as shown in Table 256.
Table 256:
Setting Send Pow convention

Calculation of sending/receiving-end circuit breaker output

Values Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW Calculated sending-end CB power/receiving-end CB power SND_CB_POWER [0.001] SND_CB_POWER [-0.001] SND_CB_POWER [1] SND_CB_POWER [-1] SND_CB_POWER [1000] SND_CB_POWER [-1000] RCV_CB_POWER [0.001] RCV_CB_POWER [-0.001] RCV_CB_POWER [1] RCV_CB_POWER [-1] RCV_CB_POWER [1000] RCV_CB_POWER [-1000]

Rcv Pow convention

Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW

If the CB configuration setting is Bus coupler, the network circuit breaker power is same as the calculated sending-end circuit breaker power.

234

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

If the CB configuration setting is Tie breaker and the CB pow consider setting is Sending end IED, the network circuit breaker power is same as the calculated sending-end circuit breaker power. If the CB Configuration setting is Tie breaker and the CB pow consider setting is Receiving end IED, the network circuit breaker power is same as the calculated receiving-end CB power. If two busbars are connected with each other permanently, then the network circuit breaker between the two busbars can be configured with the CB configuration setting set to Virtual breaker. If the CB configuration setting is set to Virtual breaker, no connection should be made at the input side of NCBDCSWI, so that it assumes all the default values of respective inputs. In Power monitoring, the network circuit breaker power is zero and the VIRTUAL_CB output is Enable. The calculated network circuit breaker power is reported to the Block logic module.

7.6.4.2

Block logic
Depending on various conditions and CB Pow consider setting, the load-shed blocking signal is calculated for bus coupler and tie breaker configuration as shown in Table 257 and Table 258 respectively.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

235

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 257:
CB configuration setting Bus Coupler

The calculation of Load shed blocking signal for Bus Coupler configuration
Conditions A = input SND_IED_QVAL is Bad (Within measurement cycle) Load shed blocking signal
1 A 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 T 2T 3T 4T

Bus Coupler

A = input SND_IED_QVAL is Bad (At measurement cycle)

A

At the instance of measurement cycle 1 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 3T 4T

2T

Bus Coupler

A = input SND_IED_TEST is TRUE or SND_CB_POS is Invalid

1 A 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 T 2T 3T 4T

Bus Coupler

A = input SND_CB_POS is Intermediate

A

1 0 1 Load shed blocking 0

t Snd CB Interm time
t' Snd CB Interm time

t (time)

T, 2T and 3T are the measurement cycles.

236

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 258:
CB configuration setting Tie breaker

The calculation of load shed blocking signal for tie breaker configuration
CB Pow consider setting Sending end IED Receiving end IED Conditions A = input SND_IED_QVAL is Bad or RCV_IED_QVAL is Bad (Within measurement cycle) Load shed blocking signal
1 A 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 T 2T 3T 4T

Tie breaker

Sending end IED

A = input SND_IED_QVAL is Bad (At measurement cycle)

A

At the instance of measurement cycle 1 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 3T 4T

2T

Identical logic if the CB Pow consider setting is selected as "Receiving end IED" and input RCV_IED_QVAL is Bad at measurement cycle.

Tie breaker

Sending end IED

A = input RCV_IED_QVAL is Bad (At measurement cycle)

A

At the instance of measurement cycle 1 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 3T 4T

2T

Identical logic if the CB Pow consider setting is selected as "Receiving end IED" and input SND_IED_QVAL is Bad at measurement cycle.

Tie breaker

Sending end IED Receiving end IED

A = input SND_IED_TEST is TRUE or SND_CB_POS is Invalid or RCV_IED_TEST is TRUE or RCV_CB_POS is Invalid

1 A 0 1 Load shed blocking 0 t (time)

Tie breaker

Sending end IED Receiving end IED

A = input SND_CB_POS is Intermediate

1 A 0 1 Load shed blocking 0

t Snd CB Interm time

t (time)

Snd CB Interm time

Identical logic if input RCV_CB_POS is Intermediate and the t value exceeds or is less than the Rcv CB Interm time setting as shown above.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

237

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

This module processes the network circuit breaker power received from the Power monitoring module based on the load-shedding blocking signals, as shown in Table 259 and the Block override setting. This processed network circuit breaker power is provided by the CB_POWER output for the monitoring view.
Table 259: Calculation of the CB_POWER output
Block override setting Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open All yes CB_POWER output 0 0

Load-shedding blocking signals Active due to IED data quality Active due to IED data quality or IED test mode or circuit breaker position

For all other conditions of the load-shedding blocking and the Block override setting, the CB_POWER output remains same as the calculated value from the Power monitoring module. The module reports the load-shedding blocking signals to the Compensated circuit breaker status module, FLS trigger logic module, General logic module and Binary to integer module.

7.6.4.3

Compensated circuit breaker status

This module calculates the compensated circuit breaker status for the various CB configuration settings. The inputs to calculate the compensated circuit breaker status when the CB configuration setting is Bus coupler. Sending-end circuit breaker position. Sending-end IED data quality. Sending-end lockout operating status. Sending-end circuit breaker service status.

The inputs to calculate the compensated circuit breaker status when the CB configuration setting is Tie breaker. Sending-end and receiving-end circuit breaker positions. Sending-end and receiving-end IED data qualities. Sending-end and receiving-end lockout operating status. Sending-end and receiving-end circuit breaker service status.

Figure 129 shows the logic for the calculation of compensated circuit breaker status for network circuit breaker.

238

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

CB configuration Bus coupler SND_CB_POS Close SND_CB_SER SND_IED_QVAL Good SND_CB_L_OUT CB configuration Tie breaker

AND

AND

OR

COMPCB_STS

AND

RCV_CB_POS Close RCV_CB_SER RCV_IED_QVAL Good RCV_CB_L_OUT

GUID-63B0420B-442D-4B34-B4EB-9072CBB27EC1 V1 EN

AND

Figure 129:

Compensated circuit breaker status logic

If the load-shedding blocking signal is active due to IED data quality bad and the Block override setting is set to Quality bad CB close, COMPCB_STS is active. If the load-shedding blocking signal is active due to IED data quality bad and the Block override setting is set to Quality bad CB open, the COMPCB_STS signal is inactive. If the load-shedding blocking is active due to various other conditions, that is, IED data quality bad or IED in test mode or circuit breaker in intermediate/invalid position and the Block override setting is set to All yes, the COMPCB_STS signal is inactive. If the CB configuration setting is set to Virtual breaker, the COMPCB_STS signal is active. If COMPCB_STS is active, the CB_COMPS_POS output is Close, else the CB_COMPS_POS output is Open. The COMPCB_STS signal is reported to the Binary to integer module.

7.6.4.4

FLS trigger logic

This module calculates the fast load-shedding trigger.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

239

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

The inputs to calculate the fast load-shedding trigger if the CB configuration setting is set to Bus coupler. Sending-end circuit breaker position. Sending-end lockout operating status. Sending-end circuit breaker service status.

The inputs to calculate the fast load-shedding trigger if the CB configuration setting is set to Tie breaker. Sending-end and receiving-end circuit breaker positions. Sending-end and receiving-end lockout operating status. Sending-end and receiving-end circuit breaker service status.

The calculation of the FLS_TRIGGER output logic is shown in Figure 130.

SND_CB_POS
Close Open Intermediate Open

OR

SND_CB_L_OUT SND_CB_SER CB configuration Bus coupler INHIBIT_TRG Load-shedding blocking signal (Block logic module)

1 0

AND

OR AND

FLS_TRIGGER

CB configuration Tie breaker

OR

AND

RCV_CB_SER RCV_CB_POS
Close Open Intermediate Open

OR

RCV_CB_L_OUT

1 0

GUID-EFEB58E0-1795-4F47-A386-13F219FED0DC V1 EN

Figure 130:

Fast load-shedding trigger initiation logic

The FLS_TRIGGER output is reported to the Binary to integer module.

7.6.4.5

General Logic
This module calculates FLS_BLOCK and BLK_BYPASS outputs based on various conditions

240

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

The FLS_BLOCK output provides the load-shedding blocking signal after considering the override action using the Block override setting. The BLK_BYPASS output indicates the successful overridden action of the loadshedding blocking signal.
Table 260:
CB Configuration setting Bus coupler

Calculation of FLS_BLOCK and BLK_BYPASS outputs for bus coupler configuration

Load-shedding blocking conditions SND_IED_TEST = TRUE Block override setting IED test mode All yes No Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open CB Interm or invalid BLK_BYPASS output TRUE FALSE FLS_BLOCK output FALSE TRUE

Bus coupler

SND_IED_QVAL = Bad

Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB Open All yes No IED test mode CB Interm or invalid

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

Bus coupler

SND_CB_POS = Intermediate or Invalid

CB Interm or invalid All yes No IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open

TRUE FALSE

FALSE TRUE

Bus coupler

If multiple load-shedding blocking signals (SND_IED_TEST = TRUE , SND_IED_QVAL = Bad, SND_CB_POS = Intermediate or Invalid) are active simultaneously

All yes CB Interm or invalid IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open No

TRUE TRUE

FALSE TRUE

FALSE

TRUE

Table 261:
CB Configuration setting Tie breaker

Calculation of FLS_BLOCK and BLK_BYPASS outputs for tie breaker configuration

Load-shedding blocking conditions SND_IED_TEST = TRUE RCV_IED_TEST = TRUE Block override setting IED test mode All yes" No Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open CB Interm or invalid" BLK_BYPASS output TRUE FALSE FLS_BLOCK output FALSE TRUE

Tie breaker

SND_IED_QVAL = Bad RCV_IED_QVAL = Bad

Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB Open All yes No IED test mode CB Interm or invalid

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

241

Section 7 Power management functions

CB Configuration setting Tie breaker Load-shedding blocking conditions SND_CB_POS = Intermediate or Invalid RCV_CB_POS = Intermediate or Invalid Block override setting CB Interm or invalid All yes No IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open Tie breaker If multiple load-shedding blocking signals are active simultaneously (SND_IED_TEST = TRUE, RCV_IED_TEST = TRUE, SND_IED_QVAL = Bad, RCV_IED_QVAL = Bad, SND_CB_POS = Intermediate OR Invalid, RCV_CB_POS = Intermediate or Invalid) All yes CB Interm or invalid IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open No BLK_BYPASS output TRUE FALSE

1MRS757256 D

FLS_BLOCK output FALSE TRUE

TRUE TRUE

FALSE TRUE

FALSE

TRUE

The Block override setting is preferred to be kept as No.

If the BLK_BYPASS output is active, the FLS_TRIGGER output remains FALSE.

If the CB configuration setting is set to Virtual breaker, the FLS_BLOCK and BLK_BYPASS outputs are FALSE. The output B_SET_CHANGE is TRUE if one or more basic settings are changed, and the output remains active for 500 ms, see Table 266.

7.6.4.6

Binary to integer
This module calculates the integer data based on various load shed information of the network circuit breaker as shown in the Table 262. Table 262 shows the individual bits information of the NW_CB_DATA output.
Table 262:
Bit 1 2 5 6

NW_CB_DATA bits information

Signal name COMPCB_STS FLS_TRIGGER BLK_QUA_POS BLOCK_TEST

Bit description Compensated CB status Fast load-shedding trigger Load-shedding blocking due to IED data quality and CB position Load-shedding blocking due to IED test mode

242

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

The group output NW_CB consists of signals for network circuit breaker which are provided to LSCACLS function.
Table 263:
Signal description Compensated CB status Fast load-shedding trigger Load-shedding blocking due to IED data quality and CB position Load-shedding blocking due to IED test mode Network circuit breaker power

Group signals for NW_CB for corresponding instance of <ij>

Group signal description for NW_CB Bit 1 of NW_CB_DATA Bit 2 of NW_CB_DATA Bit 5 of NW_CB_DATA Bit 6 of NW_CB_DATA CB_POWER Signal short name for network circuit breaker instance COMP_STS_CBij FLS_TRG_CBij FLS_BLK_CBij TST_BLK_CBij POWER_CBij

7.6.5

Signals
Table 264:
Name SND_CB_POWER SND_CB_POS SND_CB_SER SND_CB_L_OUT SND_IED_QVAL SND_IED_TEST RCV_CB_POWER RCV_CB_POS RCV_CB_SER RCV_CB_L_OUT RCV_IED_QVAL RCV_IED_TEST INHIBIT_TRG

NCBDCSWI Input signals

Type REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.0 1 1 0 1 0 0.0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Description Sending end network CB active power Sending end network CB position Sending end network CB service position Sending end network CB lockout status Sending end CB IED data quality status Sending end network CB IED test mode behaviour Receiving end network CB active power Receiving end network CB position Receiving end network CB service position Receiving end network CB lockout status Receiving end CB IED data quality status Receiving end network CB IED test mode behaviour Inhibit the trigger from network CB

Table 265:
Name NW_CB CB_POWER

NCBDCSWI Output signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Group signal of network CB Active power of network CB Circuit breaker position of network CB Virtual CB configuration is selected Block is bypassed

CB_COMPS_POS VIRTUAL_CB BLK_BYPASS

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

243

Section 7 Power management functions

Name B_SET_CHANGE FLS_BLOCK FLS_TRIGGER Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description

1MRS757256 D

One or many basic settings change Fast load shed block from network CB Fast load shed trigger from network CB

7.6.6
Table 266:
Name Block override

Settings
NCBDCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) No IED test mode Quality bad CB close Quality bad CB open CB Interm or invalid All yes Unit Step Default No Description Bypass block due to IED test or data quality or CB position

Table 267:
Name CB configuration

NCBDCSWI Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Bus coupler Tie breaker Virtual Breaker Sending end IED Receving end IED 0 - 500 Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW 0 - 500 Positive W Negative W Positive kW Negative kW Positive MW Negative MW Unit Step Default Bus coupler Description Network CB configuration

CB Pow consider Snd CB Interm time Send Pow convention

ms -

10 -

Sending end IED 200 Positive W

CB power to be considered for sending or receiving end Sending end CB intermediate time Sending end IED power convention

Rcv CB Interm time Rcv Pow convention

ms -

10 -

200 Positive W

Receiving end CB intermediate time Receiving end IED power convention

7.6.7

Measured values
Table 268:
Name SND_CB_POWER SND_CB_POS SND_CB_SER

NCBDCSWI Measured values

Type REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN Default 0.0 1 1 Description Sending end network CB active power Sending end network CB position Sending end network CB service position

Table continues on next page 244 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name SND_CB_L_OUT SND_IED_QVAL SND_IED_TEST RCV_CB_POWER RCV_CB_POS RCV_CB_SER RCV_CB_L_OUT RCV_IED_QVAL RCV_IED_TEST INHIBIT_TRG Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN REAL INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 1 0 0.0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Description Sending end network CB lockout status Sending end CB IED data quality status Sending end network CB IED test mode behaviour Receiving end network CB active power Receiving end network CB position Receiving end network CB service position Receiving end network CB lockout status Receiving end CB IED data quality status Receiving end network CB IED test mode behaviour Inhibit the trigger from network CB

7.6.8

Monitored data
Table 269:
Name CB_POWER NW_CB_DATA CB_COMPS_POS VIRTUAL_CB BLK_BYPASS B_SET_CHANGE FLS_BLOCK FLS_TRIGGER

NCBDCSWI Monitored data

Type REAL INTEGER INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Values (Range) 1=Open 2=Close 1=Yes 0=No 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit kW Description Active power of network CB Load shed data of network CB Circuit breaker position of network CB Virtual CB configuration is selected Block is bypassed One or many basic settings change Fast load shed block from network CB Fast load shed trigger from network CB

7.7
7.7.1

Network power monitoring NPMMXU

Identification
Function description Network power monitoring IEC 61850 identification NPMMXU IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification NPMMXU

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

245

Section 7 Power management functions 7.7.2 Function block

NPMMXU SOURCE1 NW_SOURCE SOURCE2 NW_PPLS1 SOURCE3 NW_PPLS2 TEST_REQUEST SOURCE4 CONFIG_ERROR SOURCE5 SOURCE6 SOURCE7 SOURCE8 SLS_TRG_INH PPLS1_DATA PPLS1_QVAL PPLS1_TEST PPLS2_DATA PPLS2_QVAL PPLS2_TEST TEST
GUID-2D1D2979-78F9-49AE-9816-C962CFADE9E3 V1 EN

1MRS757256 D

Figure 131:

Function block

7.7.3

Functionality
The network power monitoring function NPMMXU controls the load-shedding action by processing the load-shed data of various power sources received from the corresponding instances of PSCSWI functions. This function also controls the loadshedding action for configuration B by processing the load-shedding data received from the adjacent electrical areas, calculating the spinning reserve sharing mode and must-shedding sharing mode. This function calculates the island-parallel status, fast load-shedding block, slow load-shed trigger, slow load-shedding inhibition and overload amount for busbar 1... busbar 4. This function configures the available power and active power for power sources connected to the adjacent electrical areas. The load-shedding data of power sources and adjacent electrical areas are reported to LSCACLS for load-shedding action.

7.7.4

Operation principle
The operation of NPMMXU can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

246

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Configuration check

CONFIG_ERROR

SOURCE1 SOURCE2 SOURCE3 SOURCE4 SOURCE5 SOURCE6 SOURCE7 SOURCE8 SLS_TRG_INH

Source1/ source2 LS data handle

Binary to integer General logic

Busbar logic

NW_SOURCE

Power monitoring

Load shed sharing mode

PPLS1_QVAL PPLS1_DATA PPLS2_DATA PPLS2_QVAL

Adjacent area LS data handle

NW_PPLS1

TEST PPLS1_TEST PPLS2_TEST

NW_PPLS2
Test request logic

TEST_REQUEST

GUID-F0D4405B-6063-4F23-899F-996568BA25D0 V1 EN

Figure 132:

Functional module diagram

NPMMXU receives the inputs from power sources through the SOURCE1 SOURCE8 group inputs. The SOURCE1 group input consists of load-shedding information corresponding to the power source 1. Similarly, SOURCE2 SOURCE8 contain load-shedding information for the corresponding power sources. This function receives the load-shedding data of adjacent electrical network area 1 and adjacent electrical network area 2 through the PPLS1_DATA and PPLS2_DATA inputs respectively. Table 270 shows the information contained in the PPLS1_DATA input. The PPLS2_DATA input contains the identical information for adjacent electrical network area 2.
Table 270:
Bits 1 2 3 4 5...29 30 31

PPLS1_DATA bits information

Bit Description CB status of adjacent electrical network area 1 Power balance status of adjacent electrical network area 1 Must-shedding status of adjacent electrical network area 1 Error status of adjacent electrical network area 1 Spinning reserve or must shed of adjacent electrical network area 1 CB blocking status of adjacent electrical network area 1 Load-shedding blocking status of adjacent electrical network area 1

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

247

Section 7 Power management functions

7.7.4.1 Configuration check

1MRS757256 D

Based on the configuration of power source 1 and power source 2, the module calculates the configuration check. The configuration check is activated if any of the condition is true. The power source 1 is configured as generator. The power source 1 is configured for busbar number other than 1. The power source 2 is configured as generator. The power source 2 is configured for busbar number other than 1 or 2.

If the configuration check is activated, the CONFIG_ERROR output is TRUE, else the CONFIG_ERROR output is FALSE. The configuration check signals for the power source 1 and power source 2 are provided to the Source 1/source 2 LS data handle module.

7.7.4.2

Test request logic

Based on the test modes of PML630s installed in the adjacent electrical network areas, PML630 can be configured to the test mode if the TEST_REQUEST output is activated. Table 271 shows the calculation of the TEST_REQUEST output with respect to the Disable test request setting and various inputs.
Table 271: TEST_REQUEST output calculation
TEST FALSE/TRUE FALSE/TRUE Yes FALSE/TRUE FALSE/TRUE Input(s) PPLS1_TEST or PPLS2_TEST FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE Output TEST_REQUEST FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE

Setting Disable test request No

This module calculates the load-shedding enable signals ENA_PPLS1 and ENA_PPLS2 for adjacent electrical areas. These status signals determine whether the load-shedding data of the corresponding adjacent electrical network areas are considered or not. Table 272 shows the calculation of the ENA_PPLS1 status signal for electrical network area 1. Similarly, the ENA_PPLS2 is calculated for electrical network area 2.

248

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 272:
TEST FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE

Calculation for ENA_PPLS1

Inputs PPLS1_TEST FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE Signal ENA _PPLS1 TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE

The ENA_PPLS1 and ENA_PPLS2 signals are provided to the Power monitoring module, Adjacent area LS data handle module, Source1/source2 LS data handle module and Load shed sharing mode module.

7.7.4.3

Adjacent area LS data handle

Based on the different conditions, this module processes the adjacent electrical network areas load-shedding data. The module considers the PPLS1_DATA input in following conditions. The Grid1 connectivity setting is set to Peer substation. The PPLS1_QVAL input is Good. The compensated CB status of power source1, that is, CCB_CLS_SRC1, is TRUE. The enabling load-shedding status, that is, ENA_PPLS1, is TRUE.

If any one or more of the above conditions are not true, the module considers the PPLS1_DATA input as zero. The must-shedding status (that is, bit 3 of PPLS1_DATA) remains unchanged, if all of the following conditions are satisfied. The bit 1 of PPLS1_DATA, is TRUE. The bit 4 of PPLS1_DATA, is FALSE. The bit 30 of PPLS1_DATA, is FALSE. The bit 31 of PPLS1_DATA, is FALSE.

If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the must-shedding status is FALSE. The power balance status (that is, bit 2 of PPLS1_DATA) remains unchanged, if the following conditions are satisfied.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

249

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

All conditions for processing the must-shedding status hold good. The overcurrent operate status for power source 1, that is, OC_OPR_SRC1 is FALSE. The maximum demand operate status for power source 1, that is, MAX_DMD_SRC1 is FALSE. The external slow load-shed trigger for power source 1, that is, EXT_SLT_SRC1 is FALSE.

If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the power balance status is FALSE. The logic is identical for processing the PPLS2_DATA input and its power balance status and must-shedding status. The processed inputs PPLS1_DATA and PPLS2_DATA are provided as PEER1_DATA and PEER2_DATA respectively. Table 273 shows the bits and corresponding signal name for PEER1_DATA and PEER2_DATA.
Table 273:
Bit No 1 2 3 5 .. 29 30 31

The bits description for PEER1_DATA AND PEER2_DATA

Signal name for PEER1_DATA RCV_CB_STS1 RCV_SR_STS1 RCV_MS_STS1 RCV_LS_POW1 RCV_CB_BLK1 LS_BLK_STS1 Signal name for PEER2_DATA RCV_CB_STS2 RCV_SR_STS2 RCV_MS_STS2 RCV_LS_POW2 RCV_CB_BLK2 LS_BLK_STS2

The module provides the PEER1_DATA and PEER2_DATA to Source1/source2 LS data handle module, Power monitoring module and Load shedding sharing mode logic module.

7.7.4.4

Source1/source2 LS data handle

Based on the different conditions, the module calculates the compensated circuit breaker status, island parallel status, fast load-shedding blocking status, circuit breaker blocking status and fast load-shedding trigger for power source 1 and power source 2.

250

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 274:
External source Peer substation

Calculation of compensated CB status for power source 1

The calculated Compensated CB status for Power source 1 CCB_CLS_SRC1
CCB_CLS_SRC1 RCV_CB_STS1 RCV_CB_BLK1 ENA_PPLS1 PPLS1_QVAL
AND AND AND OR AND

Setting Grid1 connectivity

COMP_CB_SRC1

Table 275:
External source Peer substation

Calculation of island or parallel status for power source 1

The calculated island parallel status for Power source 1 ISD_PAR_SRC1
ISD_PAR_SRC1 RCV_CB_STS1 RCV_CB_BLK1 ENA_PPLS1 PPLS1_QVAL
AND AND AND OR AND

Setting Grid1 connectivity

Island parallel (To Busbar logic module)

This module calculates CB_BLK_SRC1, that is, circuit breaker blocking status for adjacent electrical area connected by power source 1 if any of the following conditions is satisfied. The Grid1 connectivity setting is set to External source. The configuration error for power source 1 is activated. FLS_BLK_SRC1 is activated.

The fast load-shedding blocking status for power source 1 is activated if FLS_BLK_SRC1 is activated or power source 1 configuration error is activated. The fast load-shedding trigger for power source 1 is activated if the following conditions are satisfied. If FLS_TRG_SRC1 is activated. If RCV_CB_STS1 changes from TRUE to FALSE, provided Grid1 connectivity setting is set to Peer substation and RCV_CB_BLK1 is inactive and input PPLS1_QVAL is "Good" and fast load-shedding blocking status (as calculated above) is inactive. The logic is also identical for calculating the compensated circuit breaker status, island parallel status, fast load-shedding blocking status, circuit breaker blocking status and fast load-shedding trigger by considering the corresponding data for power source 2, Grid2

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

251

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

connectivity setting, PEER2_DATA, PPLS2_QVAL and ENA_PPLS2. The module reports the calculated compensated circuit breaker statuses for power source 1 and power source 2 to the Binary to integer module and Load shed sharing mode module. The module reports the calculated fast load-shedding triggers for power source 1 and power source 2 to the General logic module. The module reports the calculated island parallel status, fast load-shedding blocking status for power source 1 and power source 2 to the Busbar logic.

7.7.4.5

Power monitoring
The module calculates the available powers and active powers for power source 1 and power source 2. Based on the Grid1 connectivity setting and various other conditions, available power and active power for power source 1 are calculated as shown in Table 276.

Table 276:
Setting Grid1 connectivity External source Peer substation

The calculation of available power and active power for power source 1
Output AVA_POWER_SRC1 AVA_POW_SRC1 = AVA_POWER_SRC1 1. 2. 3. AVA_POW_SRC1 = ACT_POWER_SRC1, if ACT_POWER_SRC1 0 AVA_POW_SRC1 = 0.0, if PACT_POWER_SRC1 < 0 AVA_POW_SRC1 = AVA_POWER_SRC1, provided any of the following is satisfied. LS_BLK_STS1 is activated ENA_PPLS1 is deactivated Input PPLS1_QVAL is Bad OC_OPR_SRC1 is activated MAX_DMD_SCR1 is activated EXT_SLT_SRC1 is activated Output ACT_POW_SRC1 ACT_POW_SRC1 = ACT_POWER_SRC1 1. 2. 3. ACT_POW_SRC1 = ACT_POWER_SRC1, if ACT_POWER_SRC1 0 ACT_POW_SRC1 = 0.0, if ACT_POWER_SRC1 < 0 ACT_POW_SRC1 = ACT_POWER_SRC1, provided any of the following is satisfied. LS_BLK_STS1 is activated ENA_PPLS1 is deactivated Input PPLS1_QVAL is Bad

The logic is identical for calculating the ACT_POW_SRC2 and AVA_POW_SRC2 outputs for power source 2. The ACT_POW_SRC1, ACT_POW_SRC2, AVA_POW_SRC1 and AVA_POW_SRC2 outputs are reported for the monitoring view.

7.7.4.6

General logic
The module calculates the slow load-shedding trigger, slow load-shedding enable status for each power source based on various conditions.

252

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Based on the Ov Curr Trg interval setting, overcurrent operating statuses of the power sources can be configured to re-trigger the slow load trigger. If the Ov Curr Trg interval setting is zero, slow load-shedding trigger remains active until the overcurrent operating status is activated. If the overcurrent status is activated, slow load-shedding trigger is calculated at an interval of Ov Curr Trg interval setting. Figure 133 shows the calculation of slow load-shedding trigger if OC_ORP_SRC1 gets activated for power source 1.
1 OC_OPR_SRC1 0 1 SLS_TRG_SRC1 0

t
Time( in seconds)
GUID-2C90BD8E-EF2B-4375-8814-FF68EF4292FD V1 EN

Figure 133:

Profile of slow load trigger w.r.t Ov Curr Trg interval setting

Here, t = Set value of Ov Curr Trg interval setting Figure 7 shows the calculation of slow load-shedding trigger and slow loadshedding enable signals for power source 1.
OC_OPR_SRC1
OR

MAX_DMD_SRC1 EXT_SLT_SRC1 SLS_TRG_INH SLS_INH_SRC1

GUID-A787A72E-B271-4CA2-BBE9-3AFD6D4027CA V1 EN

AND

Slow load shed trigger (To Busbar logic module)

AND

Slow load shed enable (To Busbar logic module)

Figure 134:

Logic for calculation of slow load-shedding trigger and slow loadshedding enable signals for power source 1

The logic is identical for all the power sources.

The module also calculates the slow load-shedding start, fast load-shedding trigger and busbar number signals for all the power sources. If the slow load-shedding start signal is activated for any power source (power source 1...power source 8), slow load-shed start SLS_START is activated, provided the SLS_TRG_INH input is FALSE. If the fast load-shedding trigger is activated for any power source (power source 1...power source 8), fast load-shedding trigger SRC_FLS_TRG is activated.
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 253

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

The busbar number of power sources are represented by BB_NUMBER signal. For example, the BB_NUMBER = 4332121 represents busbar number of power source 1 = 1, busbar number of power source 2 = 2, busbar number of power source 3 = 1, busbar number of power source 4 = 2, busbar number of power source 5 = 3, busbar number of power source 6 = 3, busbar number of power source 7 = 4 and busbar number of power source 8 = 4. The module reports the slow load-shedding start and fast load-shedding trigger signal to the Binary to integer module. The module reports the slow load-shedding trigger and slow load-shedding enabling status signals for each power source to the Busbar logic module.

7.7.4.7

Load-shed sharing mode

The module calculates the spinning reserve sharing mode and must-shedding sharing mode. These modes determine how to share the spinning reserve and must shed with the PML630s installed in the adjacent electrical network areas. Based on the condition1 and condition2, the module calculates the must-shedding sharing mode MUST_SHD_MOD and spinning reserve sharing mode SP_RESV_MOD as shown in Table 277 and Table 278. Table 277 and Table 278 also show the values corresponding to the must-shedding sharing mode and spinning reserve sharing mode, for example, must-shedding sharing mode = 2 (Zero-full) means the must-shedding shared with adjacent electrical network area1 is zero and the must-shedding shared with adjacent electrical network area 2 is full.

Table 277:
Sl No 1

Calculation of must-shedding sharing mode

Condition1 If all the following conditions are satisfied: Grid1 connectivity setting is Peer substation. Input PPLS1_QVAL is Good. COMP_CB_SRC1 is TRUE. ENA_PPLS1 signal is TRUE. RCV_MS_STS1 is FALSE. LS_BLK_STS1 is FALSE. Condition2 If all the following conditions are satisfied: Grid2 connectivity setting is Peer substation. Input PPLS2_QVAL is Good. COMP_CB_SRC2 is TRUE. ENA_PPLS2 signal is TRUE. RCV_MS_STS2 is FALSE. LS_BLK_STS2 is FALSE. MUST_SHD_MOD Extended LS sharing setting

2 3 4

Xcondition1 Ycondition1 Xcondition1

Ycondition2 Xcondition2 Xcondition2

2 (Zero-full) 3 (Full-zero) Extended LS sharing setting

254

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 278:
Sl No 1

Calculation of spinning reserve sharing mode

Condition1 If all the following conditions are satisfied: Grid1 connectivity setting is Peer substation. Input PPLS1_QVAL is Good. COMP_CB_STS1 is TRUE. ENA_PPLS1 signal is TRUE. Condition2 If all the following conditions are satisfied: Grid2 connectivity setting is Peer substation. Input PPLS2_QVAL is Good. COMP_CB_STS2 is TRUE. ENA_PPLS2 signal is TRUE. 3 (Zero-full) 4 (Full-zero) 2 (Full-full) SP_RESV_MOD 2 (Full-full)

2 3 4

Xcondition1 Ycondition1 Xcondition1

Ycondition2 Xcondition2 Xcondition2

Here the notation Xcondition1 means at least one of the conditions in condition1 in Sl No 1 is not satisfied. The notation Ycondition1 means all the conditions in condition1 in Sl No 1 are satisfied. The module reports the calculated spinning reserve sharing mode and mustshedding sharing mode to the Binary to integer module.

7.7.4.8

Busbar logic
The module calculates the fast load-shedding blocking, island parallel status, slow load-shedding trigger, slow load-shedding enable status and the amount of overload for busbar 1, busbar 2, busbar 3 and busbar 4. If fast load-shed blocking signal is activated for any power source <n> configured on busbar <x>, fast load-shed blocking signal FLS_BLK_BB <x> is activated for the corresponding busbar (Here x = 1 to 4). Similar logic is used for calculation of the island parallel status ISD_PAR_BB <x>, slow load-shedding trigger SLS_TRG_BB <x> and slow load-shedding enable signal SLS_ENA_BB <x> for busbar 1, busbar 2, busbar 3 and busbar 4. If slow load-shed trigger is activated for any power source <n> configured on busbar <x>, overload amount for busbar <x>, OV_LOAD_BB <x> is same as the overload amount OVLOD_SRC <n> for the corresponding power source. If slow load trigger is activated for all power sources at the same instance, OV_LOAD_BB <x> is the sum of overload amount for the corresponding power sources connected to the same busbar. The overload amount for any busbar remains zero if the slow loadshedding trigger is inactive for respective power sources on the same busbar.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

255

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

The module reports the fast load-shedding blocking, island parallel status, slow loadshedding trigger and slow load-shedding enabling status for busbar 1, busbar 2, busbar 3 and busbar 4 to the Binary to integer module.

7.7.4.9

Binary to integer
This module provides the DATA_SOURCE and DATA_LODSHED outputs for the monitoring view.
Table 279:
Bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

DATA_SOURCE bits information

Bit Description Fast load-shedding blocking for busbar 1 Fast load-shedding blocking for busbar 2 Fast load-shedding blocking for busbar 3 Fast load-shedding blocking for busbar 4 Fast load-shedding trigger from power sources Compensated CB status for power source 1 Compensated CB status for power source 2 Compensated CB status for power source 3 Compensated CB status for power source 4 Compensated CB status for power source 5 Compensated CB status for power source 6 Compensated CB status for power source 7 Compensated CB status for power source 8 Short name of signal FLS_BLK_BB1 FLS_BLK_BB2 FLS_BLK_BB3 FLS_BLK_BB4 SRC_FLS_TRG COMP_CB_SRC1 COMP_CB_SRC2 CCB_CLS_SRC3 CCB_CLS_SRC4 CCB_CLS_SRC5 CCB_CLS_SRC6 CCB_CLS_SRC7 CCB_CLS_SRC8

Table 280:
Bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9...11 12...14 15 16 17 18 20

DATA_LODSHED bits information

Bit Description Slow load-shedding trigger for busbar 1 Slow load-shedding trigger for busbar 2 Slow load-shedding trigger for busbar 3 Slow load-shedding trigger for busbar 4 Island parallel status for busbar 1 Island parallel status for busbar 2 Island parallel status for busbar 3 Island parallel status for busbar 4 Calculated spin reserve sharing mode Calculated must shed sharing mode Slow load-shedding enabling status for busbar 1 Slow load-shedding enabling status for busbar 2 Slow load-shedding enabling status for busbar 3 Slow load-shedding enabling status for busbar 4 Slow load-shedding start for power sources Short name of signal SLS_TRG_BB1 SLS_TRG_BB2 SLS_TRG_BB3 SLS_TRG_BB4 ISD_PAR_BB1 ISD_PAR_BB2 ISD_PAR_BB3 ISD_PAR_BB4 SP_RESV_MOD MUST_SHD_MOD SLS_ENA_BB1 SLS_ENA_BB2 SLS_ENA_BB3 SLS_ENA_BB4 SLS_START

256

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

The group output NW_SOURCE contains signals which are reported to LSCACLS function. Table 281 shows the group signals for NW_SOURCE.
Table 281:
Signal description Fast load-shed blocking for busbar <x> Fast load-shed trigger from power sources <n> Compensated CB status for power source Available power of power source <n> Active power of power source <n> Slow load-shed trigger for busbar <x> Island parallel status for busbar <x> Spinning reserve sharing mode Must-shed sharing mode Slow load-shedding enabling status for busbar <x> Slow load-shedding start for power sources Governor mode of generators Busbar number of power source <n> Load-shed power of adjacent area connected with power source 1 Spinning reserve status of adjacent area connected with power source 1 Must-shed status of adjacent area connected with power source 1 Load-shed power of adjacent area connected with power source 2 Spinning reserve status of adjacent area connected with power source 2 Must-shed status of adjacent area connected with power source 2 Overload amount for busbar <x>

Group signals for NW_SOURCE

Group signal NW_SOURCE Bit 1..Bit 4 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 5 of DATA_SOURCE Bit 6..Bit 13 of DATA_SOURCE AVA_POW_SRC <n> ACT_POW_SRC <n> Bit 1..Bit 4 of DATA_LODSHED Bit 5..Bit 8 of DATA_LODSHED Bit 9..Bit 11 of DATA_LODSHED Bit 12..Bit 14 of DATA_LODSHED Bit 15..Bit 18 of DATA_LODSHED Bit 20 of DATA_LODSHED GOV_MODE_SRC <n> BB_NUMBER RCV_LS_POW1 RCV_SR_STS1 RCV_MS_STS1 RCV_LS_POW2 RCV_SR_STS2 RCV_MS_STS2 OV_LOAD_BB <x>

The group outputs NW_PPLS1 and NW_PPLS2 contain signals which are reported to corresponding instances of the PPLSGGIO function. Table 282 and Table 283 show the group signals for NW_PPLS1 and NW_PPLS2 respectively.
Table 282:
Signal description Load-shed data of adjacent area connected with power source 1 Fast load-shed blocking status for power source 1 Compensated CB open status for power source 1 (External connection)

The group signals for NW_PPLS1

Group signal NW_PPLS1 PPLS1_DATA CB_BLK_SRC1 CCB_OPN_SRC1

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

257

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 283:
Signal description

The group signals for NW_PPLS2

Group signal NW_PPLS2 PPLS2_DATA CB_BLK_SRC2 CCB_OPN_SRC2

Load-shed data of adjacent area connected with power source 2 Fast load-shed CB blocking status for power source 2 Compensated CB open status for power source 2

7.7.5

Signals
Table 284:
Name SOURCE1 SOURCE2 SOURCE3 SOURCE4 SOURCE5 SOURCE6 SOURCE7 SOURCE8 SLS_TRG_INH PPLS1_DATA PPLS1_QVAL PPLS1_TEST PPLS2_DATA PPLS2_QVAL PPLS2_TEST TEST

NPMMXU Input signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Group signal from power source 1 Group signal from power source 2 Group signal from power source 3 Group signal from power source 4 Group signal from power source 5 Group signal from power source 6 Group signal from power source 7 Group signal from power source 8 Slow load shed trigger inhibit LS data of electrical area connected with power source 1 Data quality of electrical area connected with power source 1 Electrical area PML test mode connected with power source 1 LS data of electrical area connected with power source 2 Data quality of electrical area connected with power source 2 Electrical area PML test mode connected with power source 2 Test mode behaviour of PML IED

258

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 285:
Name NW_SOURCE NW_PPLS1 NW_PPLS2

NPMMXU Output signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL REAL REAL REAL REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Group signal of network power sources GrGroup signal of electrical area connected with power source1 Group signal of electrical area connected with power source2 Available power of power source1 Active power of source1 Available power of power source2 Active power of power source2 Test request for the IED due to peer PML IED in test mode Incorrect configuration of power source1 or power source2

AVA_POW_SRC1 ACT_POW_SRC1 AVA_POW_SRC2 ACT_POW_SRC2 TEST_REQUEST CONFIG_ERROR

7.7.6
Table 286:
Name Grid1 connectivity Grid2 connectivity Ov Curr Trg interval Extended LS sharing

Settings
NPMMXU Non group settings (advanced)
Values (Range) External source Peer substation External source Peer substation 0.00 - 3.00 Half Half Zero full Full zero No Yes Unit s Step 0.01 Default External source External source 0.00 Half Half Description Source1 connectivity configuration with Grid1 Source1 connectivity configuration with Grid2 Time interval for over current based slow load trigger Extended load shed sharing for peer substations Disable test request for PML test mode

Disable test request

No

7.7.7

Measured values
Table 287:
Name SLS_TRG_INH PPLS1_DATA PPLS1_QVAL PPLS1_TEST PPLS2_DATA

NPMMXU Measured values

Type BOOLEAN INTEGER BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Default 0 0 0 0 0 Description Slow load shed trigger inhibit LS data of electrical area connected with power source1 Data quality of electrical area connected with power source1 Electrical area PML test mode connected with power source1 LS data of electrical area connected with power source2

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

259

Section 7 Power management functions

Name PPLS2_QVAL PPLS2_TEST TEST Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0 0 Description

1MRS757256 D

Data quality of electrical area connected with power source2 Electrical area PML test mode connected with power source2 Test mode behaviour of PML IED

7.7.8

Monitored data
Table 288:
Name AVA_POW_SRC1 ACT_POW_SRC1 AVA_POW_SRC2 ACT_POW_SRC2 DATA_SOURCE

NPMMXU Monitored data

Type REAL REAL REAL REAL INTEGER Values (Range) Unit kW kW kW kW Description Available power of power source1 Active power of source1 Available power of power source2 Active power of power source2 LS Trigger,LS block & CB position data of power sources Load shed data of power sources & load shed sharing modes Test request for the IED due to peer PML IED in test mode Incorrect configuration of power source1 or power source2

DATA_LODSHED

INTEGER

TEST_REQUEST

BOOLEAN

0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE

CONFIG_ERROR

BOOLEAN

7.8
7.8.1

Contingency based load-shedding LSCACLS

Identification
Function description Contingency based load-shedding IEC 61850 identification LSCACLS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification LSCACLS

260

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions Function block

LSCACLS NW_SOURCE NW_CB12 NW_CB13 NW_CB14 NW_CB15 NW_CB16 NW_CB23 NW_CB24 NW_CB25 NW_CB26 NW_CB34 NW_CB35 NW_CB36 NW_CB45 NW_CB46 NW_CB56 BB1 BB2 BB3 BB4 BB5 BB6 MAN_PRIO_SN1 MAN_POW_SN1 MAN_SHD_SN1 MAN_PRIO_SN2 MAN_POW_SN2 MAN_SHD_SN2 MAN_PRIO_SN3 MAN_POW_SN3 MAN_SHD_SN3 MAN_PRIO_SN4 MAN_POW_SN4 MAN_SHD_SN4 MAN_LS_QVAL BLOCK EXT_LS_TRG LS_RESET LS_RESET_SN1 LS_RESET_SN2 LS_RESET_SN3 LS_RESET_SN4 FLS_CNT_RST
GUID-98A364D2-6D24-4BB9-B5D6-7C479A7AED0F V2 EN

7.8.2

SNW1 SNW2 SNW3 SNW4 PPLS1 PPLS2 LS_OPERATE LS_START FLS_OPERATE FLS_START SLS_OPERATE SLS_START OPERATE_BB1 OPERATE_BB2 OPERATE_BB3 OPERATE_BB4 OPERATE_BB5 OPERATE_BB6 B_SET_CHANGE

Figure 135:

Function block

7.8.3

Functionality
The contingency based load-shedding function LSCACLS receives the loadshedding data of power sources, network circuit breakers and sheddable loads from NPMMXU, NCBDCSWI and LDMMXU. This function also receives the loadshedding data of the adjacent electrical areas from NPMMXU. This function determines the number of groups (subnetwork) of connected busbars and identifies power sources, network circuit breakers, and sheddable loads in respective groups. During contingency, this function calculates the load shed priority in the subnetworks provided there is shortfall in power in the corresponding subnetworks.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

261

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

This function also allows the manual load-shedding action that can be executed by the operator based on power or priority. This function generates the trip information for sheddable loads in the corresponding subnetworks based on the calculated load shed priority. This function reports the load shed trip information of individual sheddable loads to the corresponding load shed trip command function LSPTRC This function blocks the load-shedding action in the subnetworks if the load shed blocking signals are activated by power sources, network circuit breakers or activation of external input. This function calculates the spinning reserve and must shed information of the subneworks to share with connected adjacent electrical areas. This information is provided to the corresponding peer-to-peer load-shedding function PPLSGGIO. This function reports the various load-shedding information of the subneworks to the corresponding subnetwork output function SNWRCLS for display.

7.8.4

Operation principle
The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of LSCACLS can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next section.

262

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

BLOCK EXT_LS_TRG FLS_CNT_RST NW_SOURCE NW_CB12 NW_CB13 NW_CB14 NW_CB15 NW_CB16 NW_CB23 NW_CB24 NW_CB25 NW_CB26 NW_CB34 NW_CB35 NW_CB36 NW_CB45 NW_CB46 NW_CB56 BB1 BB2 BB3 BB4 BB5 BB6

LS blocking and trigger

FLS_COUNTER

Network determination

SRC1-8_SN_NO CB12-56_SN_NO BB1-6_SN_NO LS_START FLS_START SLS_START LS_OPERATE FLS_OPERATE SLS_OPERATE B_SET_CHANGE

General logic Load busbar monitoring

Load generation balance

Subnetwork priority calculation

SNW1 SNW2 SNW3 SNW4

LS_RESET LS_RESET_SN1 LS_RESET_SN2 LS_RESET_SN3 LS_RESET_SN4 MAN_SHD_SN1 MAN_SHD_SN2 MAN_SHD_SN3 MAN_SHD_SN4

Peer load shed logic

PPLS1 PPLS2

MAN_PRIO_SN1 MAN_PRIO_SN2 MAN_PRIO_SN3 MAN_PRIO_SN4 MAN_POW_SN1 MAN_POW_SN2 MAN_POW_SN3 MAN_POW_SN4 MAN_LS_QVAL

GUID-9453B79D-3108-4025-964C-4123D497FDAB V1 EN

Load busbar command Manual LS selection

LS_OPR_BB1 LS_OPR_BB2 LS_OPR_BB3 LS_OPR_BB4 LS_OPR_BB5 LS_OPR_BB6

MAN_LS_BEH

Figure 136:

Functional module diagram

This function receives the load-shedding data for the power sources from NPMMXU through the NW_SOURCE group input. This function receives load-shedding data for the network circuit breakers from the corresponding instances of NCBDCSWI through the NW_CB12, NW_CB13 NW_CB56 group inputs. This function also receives the load-shedding data from the different instances of LDMMXU through the BB1...BB6 group inputs.

7.8.4.1

Network determination
This module receives the following data from NPMMXU function. Compensated circuit breaker status of power sources COMP_STS_SRC<n> Each power source busbar number (busbar 14)

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

263

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

This module receives the compensated circuit breaker status of network CB COMP_STS_CBij (i = 1 to 5 and j = 2 to 6 i<j) from the respective NCBDCSWI function. The module identifies group of various busbars connected together and calculates the subnetwork number. The subnetwork number of the group is same as the lowest busbar number in the group. The power sources, network circuit breakers and busbars in the group are assigned the same subnetwork number. The subnetwork is active if minimum one compensated circuit breaker status of power source is TRUE, else subnetwork is inactive. If subnetwork is inactive, the subnetwork number of the group is zero. As power sources can be configured in the busbar 1, busbar 2, busbar 3 or busbar 4, the module can determine a maximum of four subnetworks, that is, subnetwork 1, subnetwork 2, subnetwork 3 and subnetwork 4. The subnetwork numbers of eight power sources are provided by outputs SRC1_SN_NO...SRC8_SN_NO. The subnetwork numbers of 15 network circuit breakers are provided by outputs CB12_SN_NO...CB56_SN_NO. The subnetwork numbers of six busbars are provided by outputs BB1_SN_NO...BB6_SN_NO. These data are available in the monitoring data view. If the compensated circuit breaker status of the network circuit breaker is FALSE (OPEN), the subnetwork number of the respective network circuit breaker is zero. The module determines the various active subnetworks and the subnetwork number of power sources, network circuit breakers and busbars as explained in the example below.
Subnetwork number=1 Subnetwork number=2

Power source1

Power source2

Busbar=1

CB12

Busbar=2

CB13

Power source3

Power source4

CB24

Busbar=3

CB34

Busbar=4

GUID-DAEF2C92-1C86-4DC3-BDFC-0EA8577530BE V1 EN

Figure 137:
264

Subnetwork determination scenario

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

COMP_STS_SRC1...COMP_STS_SRC4 represent the compensated circuit breaker status of power source 1...4 respectively. COMP_STS_SRC1...COMP_STS_SRC3 are TRUE and COMP_STS_SRC3 is FALSE. COMP_STS_CB12, COMP_STS_CB13, COMP_STS_CB24 and COMP_STS_CB34 represent the compensated circuit breaker status of network circuit breakers CB12, CB13, CB24 and CB34 respectively. COMP_STS_CB12 and COMP_STS_CB13 are FALSE. COMP_STS_CB24 and COMP_STS_CB34 are TRUE. The first busbar group contains the busbar 1 with lowest busbar number as 1 and the second busbar group contains the busbar 2, busbar 3 and busbar 4 with lowest busbar number as 2.
Table 289:
Equipment Power source

Outputs related to subnetwork equipment

Output SRC1_SN_NO SRC2_SN_NO SRC3_SN_NO SRC4_SN_NO Subnetwork number 1 2

Network circuit breaker

CB12_SN_NO CB13_SN_NO CB24_SN_NO CB34_SN_NO

0 2 1 2

Busbar

BB1_SN_NO BB2_SN_NO BB3_SN_NO BB4_SN_NO

The subnetwork numbers of the power sources SRC1_SN_NO...SRC8_SN_NO and network circuit breakers CB12_SN_NO...CB56_SN_NO are provided to the LS blocking and trigger module and the Load generation balance module. The subnetwork numbers of the busbars BB1_SN_NO...BB6_SN_NO are provided to the Load generation balance module. The active or inactive status of the subnetworks SN_ACTIVEz (z = 1...4) are provided to the Subnetwork priority calculation module and General logic module. The subnetwork numbers of the power source 1 and power source 2, that is, SRC1_SN_NO and SRC2_SN_NO are provided to the Peer load-shed logic module.

7.8.4.2

LS blocking and trigger

This module calculates fast load-shed blocking, fast load-shed trigger, slow loadshed trigger and extended load-shed trigger for subnetwork 1...4.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

265

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Depending on fast load-shed blocking signals received from NCBDCSWI, NPMMXU functions and subnetwork number of busbars, the load-shed blocking for particular subnetwork is calculated as follows. The module receives the fast load-shed block signal FLS_BLK_BB1...FLS_BLK_BB4 for busbar 1...4 from the NPMMXU function. If any of the busbar fast load-shed block signal is active, the corresponding subnetwork is blocked. If the FLS_BLK_BB1 signal is active, the load-shed blocking is active for subnetwork corresponding to BB1_SN_NO, for example, if FLS_BLK_BB1 is TRUE and BB1_SN_NO = 1, subnetwork 1 load-shed blocking is active. The module receives the fast load-shed block signals FLS_BLK_CBij and test mode blocking signals TST_BLK_CBij from the respective NCBDCSWI functions. If FLS_BLK_CBij is active or TST_BLK_CBij is active, the subnetwork number of busbar i and busbar j is blocked, for example, if FLS_BLK_CB12 is TRUE and BB1_SN_NO = 1 and BB1_SN_NO = 2, subnetwork 1 and subnetwork 2 loadshed blocking is active. If the BLOCK input is TRUE, all subnetworks load-shedding blocking signal is active. Figure 138 shows load-shed blocking signals for different subnetworks for various conditions.
FLS_BLK_BB1 BB1_SN_NO
Subnetwork LS block calculation

FLS_BLK_BB4 BB4_SN_NO

Subnetwork LS block calculation

OR

LS_BLOCK1

TST_BLK_CB12 FLS_BLK_CB12 BB1_SN_NO BB2_SN_NO

Subnetwork LS block calculation

OR

LS_BLOCK2

OR

LS_BLOCK3

TST_BLK_CB56 FLS_BLK_CB56 BB5_SN_NO BB6_SN_NO BLOCK

Subnetwork LS block calculation

OR

LS_BLOCK4

GUID-0A2AAEC0-773B-4C92-8728-15D0A92BAB87 V1 EN

Figure 138:

Calculation of load-shed blocking signal for subnetworks

266

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

The module receives the fast load-shed trigger signals SRC_FLS_TRG from the NPMMXU function and FLS_TRG_CBij from the respective NCBDCSWI functions. Figure 139 shows fast load-shed trigger signals for different subnetworks for various conditions.
EXT_LS_TRG SRC_FLS_TRG FLS_TRG_CB12 FLS_TRG_CB56 LS_BLOCK1 LS_BLOCK2
AND
1 0

OR

AND

FLS_TRG_SNW1

FLS_TRG_SNW2

LS_BLOCK3

AND

FLS_TRG_SNW3

LS_BLOCK4
GUID-A97495F6-B1A1-4FCF-BAD7-D6B68AE128EB V1 EN

AND

FLS_TRG_SNW4

Figure 139:

Calculation of fast load-shed trigger signal for subnetworks

The module counts the number of times the fast load-shedding trigger signal is generated and the FLS_COUNTER (fast load-shedding counter) output provides the count. The FLS_COUNTER output can be reset through the FLS_CNT_RST (fast load-shedding counter reset) input. The FLS_COUNTER output is provided in the monitoring view. The module receives the slow load-shed trigger signals, SLS_TRG_BB1...SLS_TRG_BB4, for busbar 1...4 from NPMMXU function. If any of the busbar slow load-shed trigger signal is active, slow load-shed action is initiated in corresponding subnetwork. Figure 140 shows slow load-shed trigger signals for different subnetworks for various conditions.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

267

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

OR AND

SLS_TRG_SNW1

SLS_TRG_BB1 BB1_SN_NO

Subnetwork Slow LS trigger calculation

OR

AND

SLS_TRG_SNW2

SLS_TRG_BB4 BB4_SN_NO LS_BLOCK1 LS_BLOCK2 LS_BLOCK3

Subnetwork Slow LS trigger calculation

OR

AND

SLS_TRG_SNW3

OR

LS_BLOCK4
GUID-29E97339-7FA9-4291-A222-C5794C453467 V1 EN

AND

SLS_TRG_SNW4

Figure 140:

Calculation of slow load-shed trigger signal for subnetworks

The module receives the slow load-shed enable signals, SLS_ENA_BB1...SLS_ENA_BB4, for busbar 1...4 from NPMMXU function. If any of the busbar slow load-shed enable signal is active, slow load-shed is enabled in corresponding subnetwork. If slow load enable signal is inactive for all busbars in a subnetwork, slow load-shed trigger is inhibited for corresponding subnetwork. Figure 141 shows slow load-shed enable signals for different subnetworks for various conditions.

268

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

OR

SLS_ENA_SNW1

SLS_ENA_BB1 BB1_SN_NO

Subnetwork Slow LS enable calculation

OR

SLS_ENA_SNW2

SLS_ENA_BB4 BB4_SN_NO

Subnetwork Slow LS enable calculation

OR

SLS_ENA_SNW3

OR

SLS_ENA_SNW4

GUID-78B5B261-143D-4EB4-AB48-1A66921D0716 V1 EN

Figure 141:

Calculation of slow load-shed enable signal for subnetworks

The module receives the must shed status, RCV_MS_STS1 and RCV_MS_STS2, from NPMMXU function corresponding to adjacent electrical areas connected through power source 1 and power source 2. If must shed status gets active, extended load-shed trigger is generated corresponding to the subnetwork of the power source 1 or power source 2. Figure 142 shows extended load-shed triggers for different subnetworks for various conditions.
OR AND

EXTD_TRG_SNW1

RCV_MS_STS1 SRC1_SN_NO

1 0

Subnetwork extended LS trigger calculation

OR

AND

EXTD_TRG_SNW2

RCV_MS_STS2 SRC2_SN_NO LS_BLOCK1 LS_BLOCK2 LS_BLOCK3

1 0

Subnetwork extended LS trigger calculation

OR

AND

EXTD_TRG_SNW3

OR

LS_BLOCK4
GUID-0806BC16-B266-4415-A20C-11AE4C17CF68 V1 EN

AND

EXTD_TRG_SNW4

Figure 142:
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Calculation of extended load-shed triggers for subnetworks

269

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

The fast load-shed blocking signals LS_BLOCK<z>, FLS_TRG_SNW<z>, SLS_TRG_SNW<z> and EXTD_TRG_SNW<z> for each subnetwork are provided to Subnetwork priority calculation module and General logic module.

7.8.4.3

Load busbar monitoring

The Load busbar monitoring module calculates the sheddable power corresponding to each priority, total shed load inhibited by system and total shed load inhibited by operator for each subnetwork. This module receives the power value L<m>_POWER (m = 1...10) for ten sheddable loads from each LDMMXU function. Shed priority p (p = 1...19) of sheddable load 1...5 and sheddable load 6 ...10 are received through PRIO_L1_5 and PRIO_L6_10 respectively from each LDMMXU function. Equation 10 shows the calculation of the sheddable powers for priority p for busbar x, here L<m>_POWERp is power of sheddable load <m> with priority p.
10

SHD _ POW p x = L < m > _ POWER p

m =1
GUID-C4091481-63E3-4CB7-A7C2-010334F2556C V1 EN

(Equation 10)

Equation 11 shows the calculation of the powers for priority p for each subnetwork z.
6

SHD _ POW p z = SHD _ POW p x

q =1
GUID-BC9DC647-CD17-4020-80BA-17622187630A V1 EN

(Equation 11)

In Equation 11, SHD_POWpx is considered zero if BB<x>_SN_NO output is not equal to z. Similarly, module calculates the total system inhibited load TOT_INH_SYSz and operator inhibited load TOT_INH_OPRz for each subnetwork. The sheddable power for each priority SHD_POWpx, total load inhibited by operator TOT_INH_OPRz and total load inhibited by system TOT_INH_SYSz for each subnetwork are provided to the Subnetwork priority calculation module.

7.8.4.4

Load generation balance

This module calculates the total available power, total load, total overload amount, power balance and effective power balance for subnetwork 1...4. This module receives following data from NPMMXU function.

270

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Available powers AVA_POW_SRC<n> for power sources Running powers ACT_POW_SRC<n> for power sources Compensated circuit breaker status COMP_STS_SRC<n> for power sources Island-parallel status ISL_PAR_BB1...ISL_PAR_BB4 for busbar 1...4 Overload amount OV_LOAD_BB1...OV_LOAD_BB4 for busbar 1...4 Load-shed power RCV_SR_POW1 and RCV_SR_POW2 for adjacent electrical areas Spinning reserve status RCV_SR_STS1 and RCV_SR_STS2 for adjacent electrical areas Must shed status RCV_MS_STS1 and RCV_MS_STS2 for adjacent electrical areas

This module receives the network circuit breaker power POWER_CBij from the corresponding instances of NCBDCSWI functions. If COMP_STS_SRC<n> is inactive for a power source, the available power for corresponding power source is zero. If island-parallel status ISL_PAR_BB<x> (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4) is active for any busbar in a subnetwork, the corresponding subnetwork is considered as in parallel mode else the subnetwork is considered as in island mode. Based on the island or parallel mode of the subnetwork and the governor mode of the generator, the available power of a generator in the corresponding subnetwork is calculated as shown in Table 290.
Table 290:
Governor mode Not applicable Droop MW ISO P-Control Optimize Base load Peak load

Available power calculation of the generator

Island Mode Available power Available power Active power Available power Available power Available power Active power Active power Source available power Parallel Mode Available power Active power Active power Active power Available power Active power Active power Active power

Based on the subnetwork number of power sources, the module calculates total available power AVA_POWERz in subnetwork z. AVA_POWERz is the sum of available power of all power sources in the subnetwork z. The total active power ACT_POWERz in subnetwork z is the sum of active powers of the power sources with the subnetwork number z.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

271

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Based on the subnetwork number of power source 1 and power source 2, the module processes the spinning reserve and must-shed received from adjacent electrical areas for corresponding subnetwork z as follows. The spinning reserve for subnetwork z RCV_SR_POWz is same as RCV_LS_POW1 or RCV_LS_POW2 provided spinning reserve status is active for corresponding electrical area. If both power source 1 and power source 2 are in same subnetwork, RCV_SR_POWz is the sum of RCV_LS_POW1 and RCV_LS_POW2. The must-shed for subnetwork z RCV_MS_POWz is same as RCV_LS_POW1 or RCV_LS_POW2 provided must-shed status is active for corresponding electrical area. If both power source 1 and power source 2 are in same subnetwork, RCV_MS_POWz is sum of RCV_LS_POW1 and RCV_LS_POW2. Based on the active powers and power flow direction of network circuit breakers and subnetwork number of the busbar, the module calculates the total active power for each busbar in the subnetwork z as POWER_BBz. Equation 12 calculates the total running load RUNNING_LOADz of each subnetwork z.
RUNNING _ LOADz = ACT _ POWERz + POWER _ BBz
GUID-0AF1F9E8-3C3C-4722-8703-350E95AA5A32 V1 EN

(Equation 12)

Equation 13 calculates the load imbalance LOAD_IMBALANCEz of each subnetwork z.

LOAD _ IMBALANCEz = AVA _ POWERz RUNNING _ LOADz
GUID-E9C3C4A8-ED7C-4F24-9224-0ED4EA92E1C7 V1 EN

(Equation 13)

Equation 14 calculates the power balance POWER_BALz of each subnetwork z by using SubNetw Abs offset and SubNetw Rel offset settings.
1 POWER _ BALz = 1.0 + SubNet Re l offset LOAD _ IMBALANCE z SubNet Re l offset 100
GUID-BE3CDA6B-78B8-48BB-A963-5EC81BD16553 V1 EN

(Equation 14)

Equation 15 calculates the effective power balance EFF_POW_BALz for subnetwork z.

EFF _ POW _ BALz = POWER _ BALz + RCV _ SR _ POWz
GUID-D8AAFC84-9B1B-48AE-AE61-DDE32B8214DE V1 EN

(Equation 15)

Based on the subnetwork number of busbar 1...4, this module calculates the total amount of overload power OV_LOADz for subnetwork z. The OV_LOADz is calculated as the sum of all overload amounts for busbars in the corresponding subnetwork. The calculated AVA_POWERz, RUNNING_LOADz, POWER_BALz, EFF_POW_BALz, OV_LOADz and RCV_MS_POz are provided to the Subnetwork priority calculation module.
272 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Manual LS selection
This module calculates manual load-shed priority and manual load-shed power for each subnetwork. Table 291 shows the manual load-shedding priority and manual load-shedding power calculated for subnetwork z and the MAN_LS_BEH output.
Table 291: Calculation of manual LS priority, manual LS power and MAN_LS_BEH output
Calculated manual LS priority (MAN_SHD_PRIOz) 0 SubNetw<z> Man Prio setting 0 Input MAN_PRIO_SN<z> 0 Calculated manual LS power (MAN_SHD_POWz) 0 0 SubNetw<z> Man Pow setting 0 Input MAN_POW_SN<z> Output MAN_LS_BEH

7.8.4.5

Man load-shed mode setting Disable manual LS SN Man Prio setting SN Man Pow setting SN Man Prio input SN Man Pow input

Manual LS disable Manual Prio setting Manual power setting Communicate priority Communicate power

If the Man load shed mode setting is SN Man Prio input and MAN_LS_QVAL is FALSE, the manual LS priority is the same as the SubNetw<z> Man Prio setting and MAN_LS_BEH output set to Set Prio Comm bad. Similarly, if the Man load shed mode setting is SN Man Pow input and MAN_LS_QVAL is FALSE, the manual LS power is the same as the SubNetw<z> Man Pow setting and MAN_LS_BEH output set to Set power Comm bad. The MAN_LS_BEH output is provided in the monitoring view. The calculated manual LS priority MAN_LS_POWz and manual LS power MAN_LS_PRIOz are reported to the Subnetwork priority calculation module.

7.8.4.6

Subnetwork priority calculation

This module calculates the load-shedding priority for a subnetwork. Disable LS SubNetw setting disables the load-shedding of all the four subnetworks. Enable LS SubNetw1 .. Enable LS SubNetw4 settings enables the load-shedding in an individual subnetwork. If Disable LS SubNetw setting = "Yes", the load-shedding is disabled in all four subnetworks else the load-shedding is enabled or disabled according to Enable LS SubNetw1, Enable LS SubNetw2, Enable LS SubNetw3 and Enable LS SubNetw4 settings.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

273

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

If Enable LS SubNetw1 setting = "Yes", the load-shedding is enabled in the subnetwork 1 and if Enable LS SubNetw1 setting = "No", the load-shedding is disabled in the subnetwork 1. Similarly, Enable LS SubNetw2, Enable LS SubNetw3 and Enable LS SubNetw4 settings are used to enable or disable loadshedding in the subnetwork 2, subnetwork 3 and subnetwork 4 respectively. The load-shed disable status of the subnetwork is provided by DISABLE_LSz. If SN_ACTIVEz is inactive or LS_BLOCK<z> is active for the subnetwork, no load-shed priority is calculated for the corresponding subnetwork. However, it is possible to perform loadshedding action by manual load-shedding operation even if loadshedding is blocked for the subnetwork.

The logic explained below is identical for all the subnetworks.

Based on various triggers, this module calculates the load-shed power and effective load-shed power as follows. If (FLS_TRG_SNWZ or SLS_TRG_SNWZ is active) and (EFF_POW_BALz <0), EFF_POW_BALz is considered for load-shed power LS_POWERz calculation. If MAN_SHD_SN<z> input is active, MAN_LS_POWZ is considered for required loadshed power LS_POWERz calculation. The acknowledgement of manual load-shed trigger is provided by MAN_LS_TRGZ signal. If EXTD_TRG_SNWZ is active, RCV_MS_POWz is considered for load-shed power LS_POWERz calculation. Equation 16 shows the calculation of required load-shed power LS_POWERz.
LS _ POWERz = | EFF _ POW _ BALz | + MAN _ SHD _ POWz + RCV _ MS _ POWz
GUID-A9EEC16A-A8BF-4696-A360-1900F44B1DB7 V1 EN

(Equation 16)

Equation 17 shows the calculation of effective load-shed power MUST_SHD_LODz by considering LS_POWERz and OV_LOADz.
MUST _ SHD _ LODz = MAX ( LS _ POWERz , OV _ LOADz )
GUID-7CCB37B1-1D50-4D60-A918-A17B92A8CF39 V1 EN

(Equation 17)

If no load-shed triggers are active, LS_POWERz and MUST_SHD_LODz are zero.

274

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Equation 18 shows the calculation of cumulative sheddable load power CUM_LOD_PRpz for each priority p in the subnetwork z.
CUM _ LOD _ PR p z = SHD _ POW p z + SHD _ POW p 1z
GUID-8F768B2B-A06B-4AE7-84EE-C5D86698AB3B V1 EN

(Equation 18)

Where, CUM_LOD_PR1z = SHD_POW1z

This module calculates the load-shed priority in subnetwork z by comparing the effective load-shed power MAN_SHD_SN<z> input with the cumulative sheddable load power CUM_LOD_PRpz for each priority in incremental order of p. The loadshed priority corresponds to the first pth priority so that the cumulative load-shed power CUM_LOD_PRpz is greater than or equal to MUST_SHD_LODz. This cumulative shed power for the pth priority is actual load-shed power ACT_SHD_LODz. This module can record up to 3 consecutive load-shed priorities, that is, record1 priority SHD_PRIO_RC1z, record2 priority SHD_PRIO_RC2z and record3 priority SHD_PRIO_RC3z for the subnetwork. Here, the record1 priority refers to the most recent load-shedding priority, and record2 priority and record3 priority refer to the old and older load-shedding priorities respectively. The priority based manual load-shed action is performed by activation of MLS_TRG_SNZ input which calculates the load-shed priority same as MAN _SHD_PRIOZ. Equation 19 shows the calculation of total sheddable load power SHDABL_LOADz in subnetwork z.
p =19

SHDABL _ LOADz =

SHD _ POW
p =1

p z

GUID-B2EDA990-A059-473B-B4AF-74A51B677B2F V1 EN

(Equation 19)

The load mismatch LOD_MISMATCHz in the subnetwork is calculated as the difference of SHDABL_LOADz and RUNNING_LOADz. If the calculated load-shed priority is greater than zero, this module calculates the cause of load-shed LS_OPR_STSZ based on the load-shed trigger received from the Block and trigger module. The cause of load-shed is send to the subnetwork monitoring function block.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

275

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 292:
Preference No 1 2 3 4 5

The cause of load-shed action

load-shed trigger No trigger Extended load-shed trigger Fast load-shed trigger Slow load-shed trigger Manual load-shed trigger Cause of load-shed (LS_OPR_STSz) No load-shed Extended load-shed Fast load-shed Slow load-shed Manual load-shed

If multiple load-shed triggers are activated at the same time, the cause of load-shed corresponds to the lowest preference number. If priority-based manual load-shed action is performed along with any other trigger getting activated at the same instance, the cause of load-shed is manual load-shed provided manual load-shed priority is greater than the load-shed priority calculated due to any other trigger for the subnetwork z.

If slow load-shed trigger is active along with any other trigger at the same instance, the cause of load-shed is slow load-shed provided the load-shed priority calculated due to OV_LOADz is greater than the load-shed priority calculated due to LS_POWERz. The module calculates the must-shedding status MUST_SHD_STSz and spinning reserve status SP_RESV_STSz for adjacent electrical area as shown in Figure 143.
ACT_SHD_LODZ |MUST_SHD_LODZ | < 0
& & &
tOff=50ms t

SHD_PRIO_RC1Z = 19 LS_BLOCK<z> LS_OPR_STSZ E xtended load s hed or F as t load s hed

POWER_BALZ => 0
GUID-60FD150E-9423-42A5-86CE-04E43DE8C3B4 V1 EN

MUST_SHD_STSZ

&

SP_RESV_STSZ

Figure 143:

Must-shedding status and spinning reserve status calculation

If MUST_SHD_STSz is active, extended must-shedding power MUST_SHD_POWz is the difference of the MUST_SHD_LODz and ACT_SHD_LODz. If SP_RESV_STSz is active, the extended spinning reserve power SP_RESV_POWz is same as the power balance POWER_BALz.
276 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

The module reports the MUST_SHD_STSz, SP_RESV_STSz, MUST_SHD_POWz and SP_RESV_POWz to the Peer load-shed logic module. The reset inputs, that is, RESET_SN1, RESET_SN2, RESET_SN3 and RESET_SN4, are provided to reset the load-shed data in respective subnetwork. For example, if RESET_SN1 or RESET input is active, the power balance, effective load-shedding power, actual load-shedding, load-shedding operation and recorded priorities are reset. The reset acknowledged status, record1 priority, cause of load-shed and loadshedding enabling status for the subnetworks are provided to the General logic module.

7.8.4.7

Peer load shed logic

This module receives the must-shedding mode MUST_SHD_MOD and spinning reserve mode SP_RESV_MOD from the NPMMXU function. The module processes the load-shed data of the subnetwork corresponding to the subnetworks of power source 1 and power source 2 for adjacent electrical areas. Calculation of SND_LS_POW1 and SND_LS_POW2 when power source 1 and power source 2 subnetworks are different The load-shed power SND_LS_POW1 is calculated as must-shedding power or spinning reserve power based on must-shedding status or spinning reserve status of power source 1 subnetwork. If MUST_SHD_STSz is active, SND_LS_POW1 is same as MUST_SHD_POWz. If SP_RESV_STSz is active, SND_LS_POW1 is same as SP_RESV_POWz. Similarly, SND_LS_POW2 is calculated as must shedding power or spinning reserve power based on must-shedding status or spinning reserve status of power source 2 subnetwork.

Calculation of SND_LS_POW1 and SND_LS_POW2 when power source 1 and power source 2 subnetworks are same.

Table 293:

Calculation of load-shed powers for adjacent electrical areas

SND_LS_POW1 MUST_SHD_POWz*0.5 MUST_SHD_POWz*0 MUST_SHD_POWz*1 SND_LS_POW2 MUST_SHD_POWz*0.5 MUST_SHD_POWz*1 MUST_SHD_POWz*0

Must-shedding status or spinning Must-shedding mode or spinning reserve reserve status mode MUST_SHD_STSz = Active MUST_SHD_MOD = 1 (Half-Half) MUST_SHD_MOD = 2 (Zero-Full) MUST_SHD_MOD = 3 (Full-Zero) Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

277

Section 7 Power management functions

Must-shedding status or spinning Must-shedding mode or spinning reserve reserve status mode SP_RESV_STSz = Active SP_RESV_MOD = 2 SP_RESV_MOD = 3 SP_RESV_MOD = 4 SND_LS_POW1 (SP_RESV_POWz + RCV_SR_POW2) *1 (SP_RESV_POWz + RCV_SR_POW2) *0 (SP_RESV_POWz + RCV_SR_POW2) *1

1MRS757256 D

SND_LS_POW2 (SP_RESV_POWz + RCV_SR_POW1) *1 (SP_RESV_POWz + RCV_SR_POW1) *1 (SP_RESV_POWz + RCV_SR_POW1) *0

7.8.4.8

General logic
This module calculates the load-shedding start and load-shedding operation outputs based on the load-shedding triggers and the cause of load-shed. The FLS_START output is TRUE if any of the condition is true. FLS_TRG_SNW1 is active. FLS_TRG_SNW2 is active. FLS_TRG_SNW3 is active. FLS_TRG_SNW4 is active.

If the above conditions are not true, the FLS_START output is FALSE. If the slow load start for power sources is active, the SLS_START output is TRUE else the SLS_START output is FALSE. The LS_START output is TRUE if any of the condition is satisfied. If the FLS_START output is TRUE If the SLS_START output is TRUE If EXTD_TRG_SNW1 is active or EXTD_TRG_SNW2 is active or EXTD_TRG_SNW3 is active or EXTD_TRG_SNW4 is active

If the above conditions are not true, the LS_START output is FALSE. If LS_OPR_STSz is fast load-shed, FLS_OPERATE output is TRUE. If LS_OPR_STSz is slow load-shed, SLS_OPERATE output is TRUE. If LS_OPR_STSz is fast load-shed or slow load-shed or manual load-shed or extended load-shed, LS_OPERATE output is TRUE. The B_SET_CHANGE output indicates the change in the Block override setting from one value to another value by the operator. The B_SET_CHANGE output is TRUE for 500 ms from the time of change. After 500 ms has elapsed, the B_SET_CHANGE output is FALSE.

278

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Load busbar command
This module calculates the load-shedding operation information for the sheddable loads of each busbar. Based on the load-shedding priority calculated for the subnetwork, the load-shedding operation is activated for sheddable loads in the corresponding busbar of the subnetwork. If the set priority of the sheddable load is less than or equal to the load-shedding priority, the load-shedding operation for the corresponding sheddable load is activated. The load-shedding operation command for different busbars is provided by the LS_OPR_BB1, LS_OPR_BB2, LS_OPR_BB3, LS_OPR_BB4, LS_OPR_BB5 and LS_OPR_BB6 outputs.
Table 294:
Bit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7.8.4.9

Bits information for LS_OPR_BB1

Bit description Load-shed operate sheddable load 1 Load-shed operate sheddable load 2 Load-shed operate sheddable load 3 Load-shed operate sheddable load 4 Load-shed operate sheddable load 5 Load-shed operate sheddable load 6 Load-shed operate sheddable load 7 Load-shed operate sheddable load 8 Load-shed operate sheddable load 9 Load-shed operate sheddable load 10

Bits information for LS_OPR_BB2...LS_OPR_BB6 are identical to LS_OPR_BB1. These outputs are reported to the corresponding instances of the load-shedding trip command function LSPTRC. The load-shedding operation command for the busbar is a hold value. The loadshedding operation information for the busbars can be reset by the RESET_SN1, RESET_SN2, RESET_SN3 or RESET_SN4 inputs for the respective subnetworks. The load-shedding operation commands for all six busbars can be reset by the RESET input. If the subnetwork number of a busbar is changed, the load-shedding operation command for the respective busbar is reset.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

279

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 295 shows the signals provided to respective SNWRCLS functions through group output SNW1, SNW2, SNW3 and SNW4.
Table 295:
Signal description Cumulative shed power for priority p = 1,2,3,..19 Available power of the subnetwork Running load of the subnetwork Total sheddable power of the subnetwork Power balance of the subnetwork Total load inhibited by system in the subnetwork Total load inhibited by operator in the subnetwork Load mismatch in the subnetwork Manual load-shed power Manual load-shed priority Effective power balance in the subnetwork Effective must-shed power of the subnetwork Actual load-shed in the subnetwork Load-shed operate status of the subnetwork Load-shed disable status of the subnetwork Subnetwork active status Fast load-shed blocking status of the subnetwork Slow load-shed enable status of the subnetwork Load-shed reset status of the subnetwork Manual load-shed trigger for the subnetwork Load-shed priority 1 Load-shed priority 2 Load-shed priority 3

The group signal for SNWz

Group signal description for SNW<z> CUM_LOD_PRpz AVA_POWERz RUNNING_LOADz SHDABL_LOADz POWER_BALz TOT_INH_SYSz TOT_INH_OPRz LOD_MISMATCHz MAN_SHD_POWz MAN_SHD_PRIOz EFF_POW_BALz MUST_SHD_LODz ACT_SHD_LODz LS_OPR_STSz DISABLE_LSz SN_ACTIVEz LS_BLOCKz SLS_ENA_SNWz LS_RESETz MAN_LS_TRGz SHD_PRIO_RC1z SHD_PRIO_RC2z SHD_PRIO_RC3z

Table 296 shows the signals provided to respective PPLSGGIO functions through group outputs, PPLS1 and PPLS2.
Table 296:
Signal description Load-shed power for power source 1/power source 2 subnetworks Spinning reserve status for power source 1/ power source 2 subnetwork Must-shedding status for power source 1/power source 2 subnetwork

The group signal for PPLS1/PPLS2

Group signal description for PPLS1/PPLS2 SND_LS_POW1/SND_LS_POW2 SP_RESV_STSz MUST_SHD_STSz

280

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions Signals

Table 297:
Name NW_SOURCE NW_CB12 NW_CB13 NW_CB14 NW_CB15 NW_CB16 NW_CB23 NW_CB24 NW_CB25 NW_CB26 NW_CB34 NW_CB35 NW_CB36 NW_CB45 NW_CB46 NW_CB56 BB1 BB2 BB3 BB4 BB5 BB6 MAN_PRIO_SN1

7.8.5

LSCACLS Input signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL INTEGER Default 0 Description Group signal from network power source Group signal from network CB connecting BB1 and BB2 Group signal from network CB connecting BB1 and BB3 Group signal from network CB connecting BB1 and BB4 Group signal from network CB connecting BB1 and BB5 Group signal from network CB connecting BB1 and BB6 Group signal from network CB connecting BB2 and BB3 Group signal from network CB connecting BB2 and BB4 Group signal from network CB connecting BB2 and BB5 Group signal from network CB connecting BB2 and BB6 Group signal from network CB connecting BB3 and BB4 Group signal from network CB connecting BB3 and BB5 Group signal from network CB connecting BB3 and BB6 Group signal from network CB connecting BB4 and BB5 Group signal from network CB connecting BB4 and BB6 Group signal from network CB connecting BB5 and BB6 Group signal from sheddable loads for load busbar 1 Group signal from sheddable loads for load busbar 2 Group signal from sheddable loads for load busbar 3 Group signal from sheddable loads for load busbar 4 Group signal from sheddable loads for load busbar 5 Group signal from sheddable loads for load busbar 6 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 1

Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

281

Section 7 Power management functions

Name MAN_POW_SN1 MAN_SHD_SN1 MAN_PRIO_SN2 MAN_POW_SN2 MAN_SHD_SN2 MAN_PRIO_SN3 MAN_POW_SN3 MAN_SHD_SN3 MAN_PRIO_SN4 MAN_POW_SN4 MAN_SHD_SN4 MAN_LS_QVAL BLOCK EXT_LS_TRG LS_RESET LS_RESET_SN1 LS_RESET_SN2 LS_RESET_SN3 LS_RESET_SN4 FLS_CNT_RST Type REAL BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description

1MRS757256 D

Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 1 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 1 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 2 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 2 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 2 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 3 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 3 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 3 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 4 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 4 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 4 Manual load shed communicated data quality Block for fast load shed and slow load shed External load shed trigger Load shed reset for all subnetworks Load shed reset for subnetwork 1 Load shed reset for subnetwork 2 Load shed reset for subnetwork 3 Load shed reset for subnetwork 4 Signal for fast load shed counter reset

Table 298:
Name SNW1 SNW2 SNW3 SNW4 PPLS1 PPLS2 LS_OPERATE LS_START FLS_OPERATE FLS_START SLS_OPERATE SLS_START OPERATE_BB1 OPERATE_BB2 OPERATE_BB3

LSCACLS Output signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Description Group signal for subnetwork 1 Group signal for subnetwork 2 Group signal for subnetwork 3 Group signal for subnetwork 4 Group signal of electrical area connected with power source1 Group signal of electrical area connected with power source2 Load shed operate Load shed start Fast load shed operate Fast load shed start Slow load shed operate Slow load shed start Load shed operate for loads in busbar1 Load shed operate for loads in busbar2 Load shed operate for loads in busbar3

Table continues on next page 282 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name OPERATE_BB4 OPERATE_BB5 OPERATE_BB6 B_SET_CHANGE Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER BOOLEAN Description Load shed operate for loads in busbar4 Load shed operate for loads in busbar5 Load shed operate for loads in busbar6 One or many basic settings changed

7.8.6
Table 299:
Name Disable LS SubNetw Enable LS SubNetw1 Enable LS SubNetw2 Enable LS SubNetw3 Enable LS SubNetw4 SubNetw1 Man Prio SubNetw2 Man Prio SubNetw3 Man Prio SubNetw4 Man Prio SubNetw1 Man Pow SubNetw2 Man Pow SubNetw3 Man Pow SubNetw4 Man Pow

Settings
LSCACLS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range) Yes No No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 0 - 19 0 - 19 0 - 19 0 - 19 0.0 - 999999.9 0.0 - 999999.9 0.0 - 999999.9 0.0 - 999999.9 Unit kW kW kW kW Step 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Default No Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Description Disable load-shedding in all subneworks Enable load-shedding in subnetwork 1 Enable load-shedding in subnetwork 2 Enable load-shedding in subnetwork 3 Enable load-shedding in subnetwork 4 Manual load shed priority for subnetwork 1 Manual load shed priority for subnetwork 2 Manual load shed priority for subnetwork 3 Manual load shed priority for subnetwork 4 Manual load shed power in kilo watt for subnetwork 1 Manual load shed power in kilo watt for subnetwork 2 Manual load shed power in kilo watt for subnetwork 3 Manual load shed power in kilo watt for subnetwork 4

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

283

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

Table 300:
Name Operation

LSCACLS Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range) Off On -1000.00 - 1000.00 -100.0 - 100.0 Disable manual LS SN Man Prio setting SN Man Pow setting SN Man Prio input SN Man Pow input Unit kW % Step 0.01 1.0 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Disable manual LS Description Operation Mode Off / On Absolute safety margin for power balance Relative safety margin for power balance Manual load shed mode selection

SubNetw Abs offset SubNetw Rel offset Man load shed mode

7.8.7

Measured values
Table 301:
Name MAN_PRIO_SN1 MAN_POW_SN1 MAN_SHD_SN1 MAN_PRIO_SN2 MAN_POW_SN2 MAN_SHD_SN2 MAN_PRIO_SN3 MAN_POW_SN3 MAN_SHD_SN3 MAN_PRIO_SN4 MAN_POW_SN4 MAN_SHD_SN4 MAN_LS_QVAL BLOCK EXT_LS_TRG LS_RESET LS_RESET_SN1 LS_RESET_SN2 LS_RESET_SN3 LS_RESET_SN4 FLS_CNT_RST

LSCACLS Measured values

Type INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Default 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 1 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 1 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 1 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 2 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 2 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 2 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 3 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 3 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 3 Priority for manual load shed in subnetwork 4 Power in kW for manual load shed in subnetwork 4 Manual load shed trigger for subnetwork 4 Manual load shed communicated data quality Block for fast load shed and slow load shed External load shed trigger Load shed reset for all subnetworks Load shed reset for subnetwork 1 Load shed reset for subnetwork 2 Load shed reset for subnetwork 3 Load shed reset for subnetwork 4 Signal for fast load shed counter reset

284

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions Monitored data

Table 302:
Name LS_OPERATE LS_START FLS_OPERATE FLS_START SLS_OPERATE SLS_START B_SET_CHANGE MAN_LS_BEH

7.8.8

LSCACLS Monitored data

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 1=Manual LS disable 2=Manual Prio setting 3=Manual power setting 4=Communicate priority 5=Communicate power 6=Set Prio Comm bad 7=Set power Comm bad Unit Description Load shed operate Load shed start Fast load shed operate Fast load shed start Slow load shed operate Slow load shed start One or many basic settings changed Manual load shed behaviour

FLS_COUNTER

INTEGER

Counter for number of fast load shed triggers generated Subnetwork number of network CB12 Subnetwork number of network CB13 Subnetwork number of network CB14 Subnetwork number of network CB15 Subnetwork number of network CB16 Subnetwork number of network CB23 Subnetwork number of network CB24 Subnetwork number of network CB25 Subnetwork number of network CB26

CB12_SN_NO CB13_SN_NO CB14_SN_NO CB15_SN_NO CB16_SN_NO CB23_SN_NO CB24_SN_NO CB25_SN_NO CB26_SN_NO

INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER

Table continues on next page PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 285

Section 7 Power management functions

Name CB34_SN_NO CB35_SN_NO CB36_SN_NO CB45_SN_NO CB46_SN_NO CB56_SN_NO SRC1_SN_NO SRC2_SN_NO SRC3_SN_NO SRC4_SN_NO SRC5_SN_NO SRC6_SN_NO SRC7_SN_NO SRC8_SN_NO BB1_SN_NO BB2_SN_NO BB3_SN_NO BB4_SN_NO BB5_SN_NO BB6_SN_NO Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Values (Range) Unit -

1MRS757256 D

Description Subnetwork number of network CB34 Subnetwork number of network CB35 Subnetwork number of network CB36 Subnetwork number of network CB45 Subnetwork number of network CB46 Subnetwork number of network CB56 Subnetwork number of source1 Subnetwork number of source2 Subnetwork number of source3 Subnetwork number of source4 Subnetwork number of source5 Subnetwork number of source6 Subnetwork number of source7 Subnetwork number of source8 Subnetwork number of busbar1 Subnetwork number of busbar2 Subnetwork number of busbar3 Sub network number of busbar4 Subnetwork number of busbar5 Subnetwork number of busbar6

7.9
7.9.1

Load-shed trip command LSPTRC

Identification
Function description Load-shed trip command IEC 61850 identification LSPTRC IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification LSPTRC

286

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions Function block

LSPTRC LBB_OPR_CMD OPR_SL1 OPR_SL2 OPR_SL3 OPR_SL4 OPR_SL5 OPR_SL6 OPR_SL7 OPR_SL8 OPR_SL9 OPR_SL10
GUID-AC4B4338-35D9-46BD-B677-D525DFA61142 V1 EN

7.9.2

Figure 144:

Function block

7.9.3

Functionality
The load-shedding trip command function LSPTRC is the output interface function. Based on the operating input received from LSCACLS, LSPTRC provides the load-shedding trip signals for individual sheddable loads of each load busbar.

7.9.4

Operation principle
The functional module diagram describes the operation of LSPTRC.

LBB_OPR_CMD

General logic

OPR_SL1 OPR_SL2 OPR_SL3 OPR_SL4 OPR_SL5 OPR_SL6 OPR_SL7 OPR_SL8 OPR_SL9 OPR_SL10

GUID-1E68DA55-E901-4AB3-AC31-2E119B5080B1 V2 EN

Figure 145:

Functional module diagram

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

287

Section 7 Power management functions

7.9.4.1 General logic

1MRS757256 D

Based on the LBB_OPR_CMD input, the general logic calculates the load-shedding trip information for each sheddable load (that is, sheddable load 1, sheddable load 2...sheddable load 10). The OPR_SL1, OPR_SL2OPR_SL10 outputs provide the load-shedding trip information for sheddable load 1, sheddable load 2...sheddable load10 respectively. Table 303 shows the OPR_SL1, OPR_SL2OPR_SL10 outputs with respect to the individual bits of the LBB_OPR_CMD input.
Table 303:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Load busbar operating command

Outputs OPR_SL1 OPR_SL2 OPR_SL3 OPR_SL4 OPR_SL5 OPR_SL6 OPR_SL7 OPR_SL8 OPR_SL9 OPR_SL10

Bits information of input LBB_OPR_CMD

If any bit value is active, the corresponding output is active. For example, if the bit 1 is active, the OPR_SL1 output is TRUE, else OPR_SL1 output is FALSE. Similarly, this applies to all other bits and corresponding outputs.

7.9.5

Signals
Table 304:
Name LBB_OPR_CMD

LSPTRC Input signals

Type INTEGER Default 0 Description Load bus bar operate command for ten sheddable loads

Table 305:
Name OPR_SL1 OPR_SL2 OPR_SL3 OPR_SL4 OPR_SL5

LSPTRC Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Operate command for the sheddable load1 Operate command for the sheddable load2 Operate command for the sheddable load3 Operate command for the sheddable load4 Operate command for the sheddable load5

Table continues on next page 288 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name OPR_SL6 OPR_SL7 OPR_SL8 OPR_SL9 OPR_SL10 Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Operate command for the sheddable load6 Operate command for the sheddable load7 Operate command for the sheddable load8 Operate command for the sheddable load9 Operate command for the sheddable load10

7.9.6

Measured values
Table 306:
Name LBB_OPR_CMD

LSPTRC Measured values

Type INTEGER Default 0 Description Load bus bar operate command for ten sheddable loads

7.9.7

Monitored data
Table 307:
Name OPR_SL1 OPR_SL2 OPR_SL3 OPR_SL4 OPR_SL5 OPR_SL6 OPR_SL7 OPR_SL8 OPR_SL9 OPR_SL10

LSPTRC Monitored data

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Values (Range) 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate 0=Reset 1=Operate Unit Description Operate command for the sheddable load1 Operate command for the sheddable load2 Operate command for the sheddable load3 Operate command for the sheddable load4 Operate command for the sheddable load5 Operate command for the sheddable load6 Operate command for the sheddable load7 Operate command for the sheddable load8 Operate command for the sheddable load9 Operate command for the sheddable load10

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

289

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

7.10
7.10.1

Output interface for subnetworks SNWRCLS

Identification
Function description Subnetwork output IEC 61850 identification SNWRCLS IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification SNWRCLS

7.10.2

Function block
SNW SNWRCLS DISABLE_LS SN_ACTIVE LS_BLOCK SLS_TRG_INH NEG_POW_BAL LS_RESET MAN_LS_TRG LS_OPERATE LS_OPR_STS AVA_POWER RUNNING_LOAD SHDABL_LOAD POWER_BAL EFF_POW_BAL LOD_MISMATCH SHD_PRIO_RC1 SHD_PRIO_RC2 SHD_PRIO_RC3 MUST_SHD_LOD ACT_SHD_LOD DIF_MUST_ACT MAN_SHD_POW MAN_SHD_PRIO

GUID-CD010DA6-FFC9-4529-A751-EC114A78A448 V2 EN

Figure 146:

Function block

7.10.3

Functionality
The subnetwork output function SNWRCLS is an interface function for a subnetwork. SNWRCLS receives the subnetwork information from the contingency based load-shedding function LSCACLS. Based on this, SNWRCLS provides the outputs for display, for example, load-shedding operating status, loadshedding priority available power, active power, power balance and effective power balance.

7.10.4

Operation principle
The operation of SNWRCLS can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

290

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

SNW

CUM_LOD_PR1-19 AVA_POWER RUNNING_LOAD SHDABL_LOAD POWER_BAL LOD_INH_SYS LOD_INH_OPR LOD_MISMATCH MAN_SHD_POW MAN_SHD_PRIO EFF_POW_BAL MUST_SHD_LOD ACT_SHD_LOD LS_OPR_STS DISABLE_LS SN_ACTIVE LS_BLOCK LS_RESET MAN_LS_TRG SHD_PRIO_RC1 SHD_PRIO_RC2 SHD_PRIO_RC3

General logic
GUID-D5FEC07E-A8B5-4C08-A435-7D656C9DC858 V2 EN

NEG_POW_BAL LS_OPERATE DIF_MUST_ACT SLS_TRG_INH

Figure 147:

Functional module diagram

SNWRCLS receives different load-shedding data of the subnetwork from LSCACLS through the SNW group input. The function provides various load-shedding information for the subnetwork corresponding to the inputs received from the LSCACLS function.
Table 308:
Output CUM_LOD_PR1-19

Load-shedding information provided by SNWRCLS for the subnetwork

Load-shedding information This output provides the cumulative load-shedding power for priority = 1. Similarly, the cumulative load-shedding power for the priority = 2, 3...19 are provided by the CUM_LOD_PR2, CUM_LOD_PR3CUM_LOD_PR19 outputs respectively. This output provides the total available power of the subnetwork. This output provides the total load of the subnetwork. This output provides the total load of the subnetwork available for the load-shedding. This output provides the load generation balance of the subnetwork. This output provides the total system inhibition (Auto inhibition) of the sheddable load feeders in the subnetwork.

AVA_POWER RUNNING_LOAD SHDABL_LOAD POWER_BAL LOD_INH_SYS Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

291

Section 7 Power management functions

Output LOD_INH_OPR LOD_MISMATCH MAN_SHD_POW MAN_SHD_PRIO EFF_POW_BAL Load-shedding information

1MRS757256 D

This output provides the total operator inhibited (Manual inhibition) of the sheddable load feeders in the subnetwork. This output provides the load mismatch in the subnetwork. This output provides the amount of load to be shed by the operator in the subnetwork during manual load-shed action. This output provides the load shed priority to be executed by the operator in the subnetwork during manual load-shed action. This output provides the effective load generation balance of the subnetwork considering power balance of the subnetwork and spinning reserve power received from adjacent electrical areas. This output provides the must be shed power of the subnetwork. This output provides the actual load-shed power of the subnetwork. This output provides load shed operated status such as No Load shed/Fast Load shed/Slow Load shed/Manual Load shed/ Extended Load shed This output provides load-shed disable status in the subnetwork. This output provides the subnetwork active information. This output provides the load-shed block information of the subnetwork. This output provides the load-shed reset information of the subnetwork. This output provides the manual load-shed trigger information. Latest load-shed priority Old load-shed priority Older load-shed priority These outputs show the three load-shed priority generated in the subnetwork. After load-shed reset action the shed priority resets to zero.

MUST_SHD_LOD ACT_SHD_LOD LS_OPR_STS

DISABLE_LS SN_ACTIVE LS_BLOCK LS_RESET MAN_LS_TRG SHD_PRIO_RC1 SHD_PRIO_RC2 SHD_PRIO_RC3

For more information on the above mention inputs, see the LSCACLS function.

7.10.4.1

General logic
The General logic module calculates the load-shedding information of the subnetwork.

292

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Table 309:
Output LS_OPERATE

Load-shedding information of the subnetwork calculated by the General logic module

Load-shedding information If LS_OPR_STS output is Fast Load shed, Slow Load shed, Manual Load shed or Extended Load shed, then the LS_OPERATE output is TRUE, else the LS_OPERATE output is FALSE. This output is calculated as TRUE if the EFF_POW_BAL value is less than zero (that is, negative). This output provides the difference in the must-shedding and the actual loadshedding of the subnetwork, that is, DIF_MUST_ACT = MUST_SHD_LOD - ACT_SHD_LOD. If SLS_ENA_SNW signal is activated, SLS_TRG_INH is inactive else SLS_TRG_INH is active.

NEG_POW_BAL DIF_MUST_ACT

SLS_TRG_INH

7.10.5

Signals
Table 310:
Name SNW

SNWRCLS Input signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL Default Description Group signal for subnetwork

Table 311:
Name DISABLE_LS SN_ACTIVE LS_BLOCK SLS_TRG_INH NEG_POW_BAL LS_RESET MAN_LS_TRG LS_OPERATE LS_OPR_STS AVA_POWER RUNNING_LOAD SHDABL_LOAD POWER_BAL EFF_POW_BAL LOD_MISMATCH SHD_PRIO_RC1 SHD_PRIO_RC2 SHD_PRIO_RC3

SNWRCLS Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER REAL REAL Description Load shed disable Subnetwork active status Load shed block Slow load shed trigger inhibit Negative power balance status Load shed reset Manual load shed trigger Load shed operate Load shed operated status Total Available power Total load Total sheddable load Power balance in the subnetwork Effective power balance in the subnetwork Total load mismatch Record-1 subnetwork shed priority Record-2 subnetwork shed priority Record-3 subnetwork shed priority Must be load shed Actually shed load

MUST_SHD_LOD ACT_SHD_LOD

Table continues on next page PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual 293

Section 7 Power management functions

Name DIF_MUST_ACT MAN_SHD_POW MAN_SHD_PRIO Type REAL REAL INTEGER Description

1MRS757256 D

Difference between the must be load shed and actual load shed Manual load shed power settings Manual load shed Priority settings

7.10.6

Monitored data
Table 312:
Name DISABLE_LS SN_ACTIVE LS_BLOCK SLS_TRG_INH NEG_POW_BAL LS_RESET MAN_LS_TRG LS_OPERATE LS_OPR_STS

SNWRCLS Monitored data

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=No Load shed 1=Fast Load shed 2=Slow Load shed 3=Manual Load shed 4=Plant level Load shed 5=Extended Load shed Unit Description Load shed disable Subnetwork active status Load shed block Slow load shed trigger inhibit Negative power balance status Load shed reset Manual load shed trigger Load shed operate Load shed operated status

AVA_POWER RUNNING_LOAD SHDABL_LOAD POWER_BAL EFF_POW_BAL LOD_MISMATCH MUST_SHD_LOD ACT_SHD_LOD

REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL

kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW

Total Available power Total load Total sheddable load Power balance in the subnetwork Effective power balance in the subnetwork Total load mismatch Must be load shed Actually shed load

Table continues on next page

294

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name DIF_MUST_ACT Type REAL Values (Range) Unit kW Description Difference between the must be load shed and actual load shed Manual load shed power settings Amount of load inhibited by operator Amount of load inhibited by system Cumulative load priority 1 Cumulative load priority 2 Cumulative load priority 3 Cumulative load priority 4 Cumulative load priority 5 Cumulative load priority 6 Cumulative load priority 7 Cumulative load priority 8 Cumulative load priority 9 Cumulative load priority 10 Cumulative load priority 11 Cumulative load priority 12 Cumulative load priority 13 Cumulative load priority 14 Cumulative load priority 15 Cumulative load priority 16 Cumulative load priority 17 Cumulative load priority 18 Cumulative load priority 19

MAN_SHD_POW LOD_INH_OPR LOD_INH_SYS CUM_LOD_PR1 CUM_LOD_PR2 CUM_LOD_PR3 CUM_LOD_PR4 CUM_LOD_PR5 CUM_LOD_PR6 CUM_LOD_PR7 CUM_LOD_PR8 CUM_LOD_PR9 CUM_LOD_PR10 CUM_LOD_PR11 CUM_LOD_PR12 CUM_LOD_PR13 CUM_LOD_PR14 CUM_LOD_PR15 CUM_LOD_PR16 CUM_LOD_PR17 CUM_LOD_PR18 CUM_LOD_PR19

REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL

kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW

7.11
7.11.1

Peer-to-peer load-shedding PPLSGGIO

Identification
Function description Peer-to-peer load-shedding IEC 61850 identification PPLSGGIO IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE identification PPLSGGIO 295

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Section 7 Power management functions 7.11.2 Function block

PPLSGGIO PPLS NW_PPLS PEER_CB_STS PEER_SR_STS PEER_MS_STS PEER_SRC_BLK PEER_SN_BLK PEER_DATA_ER LS_DATA_ER

1MRS757256 D

GUID-44A61373-A7B1-43FE-988F-A7DCEA69715C V1 EN

Figure 148:

Function block

7.11.3

Functionality
PPLSGGIO is the output interface for the load-shedding data for an adjacent electrical area connected with the power source. The load-shedding information is converted into weighted integer data. This function also provides outputs for the loadshedding information received from the corresponding connected electrical area.

7.11.4

Operation principle
The operation of PPLSGGIO can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

PPLS
General logic

NW_PPLS

LS_DATA LS_DATA_ER PEER_CB_STS PEER_SR_STS PEER_MS_STS PEER_SRC_BLK PEER_SN_BLK PEER_DATA_ER PEER_SP_RSV PEER_MUST_LS

GUID-20810C87-7915-4691-B9DD-5BE26E2B4BD4 V1 EN

Figure 149:

Functional module diagram

PPLSGGIO receives the different load-shedding data of the subnetwork from LSCACLS through the group input PPLS. PPLSGGIO receives the circuit breaker information for external connection and loadshedding data of the connected adjacent electrical area from NPMMXU function through the group input NW_PPLS.

296

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

General logic
This module calculates an error signal if the load-shed power of the subnetwork SND_LS_POW exceeds 33554431 kW. This error is indicated by the LS_DATA_ER output. Based on various load shed information, the module calculates the LS_DATA for adjacent electrical area. Table 313 shows the LS_DATA output bit-wise information.
Table 313:
Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5...29 30 31 Signals CCB_OPN_SRC SP_RESV_STS MUST_SHD_STS LS_DATA_ER SND_LS_POW CB_BLK_SRC LS_BLOCK

7.11.4.1

Output LS_DATA bits information sent to adjacent electrical area

Signal description Compensated CB open status for power source 1 or power source 2 Spinning reserve status of subnetwork for power source 1 or power source 2 Must-shedding status of subnetwork for power source 1 or power source 2 Error Load-shed power of subnetwork for power source 1 or power source 2 Fast load-shed CB blocking status for power source 1 or power source 2 Load-shedding blocking status of subnetwork for power source 1 or power source 2

See NPMMXU and LSCACLS function for more information of the signals. Based on PPLS1_DATA or PPLS2_DATA received for adjacent electrical areas, this module provides various load-shedding information as shown in Table 314.
Table 314:
1 2 3 4 30 31

The load-shedding information received from adjacent electrical area

Outputs PEER_CB_STS PEER_SR_STS PEER_MS_STS PEER_DATA_ER PEER_SRC_BLK PEER_SN_BLK

Bits of PPLS1_DATA or PPLS2_DATA

If PEER_MS_STS of PPLS1_DATA or PPLS2_DATA is active, MUST_SHD_STS of LS_DATA remains inactive. The spinning reserve and must-shedding power of adjacent electrical area is calculated as follows.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

297

Section 7 Power management functions

1MRS757256 D

If PEER_SR_STS is TRUE, the spinning reserve of the adjacent electrical area is provided by PEER_SP_RSV output. If PEER_SR_STS is FALSE, the PEER_SP_RSV output is zero. If PEER_MS_STS is TRUE, the must-shedding power of the adjacent electrical area is provided by PEER_MUST_LS output. If the PEER_MS_STS is FALSE, the PEER_MUST_LS output is zero. Once PEER_MS_STS is TRUE, PEER_MUST_LS is on hold until the subnetwork is reset. The PEER_MUST_LS is reset with activation of LS_RESET signal for corresponding subnetwork.

7.11.5

Signals
Table 315:
Name PPLS NW_PPLS

PPLSGGIO Input signals

Type GROUP SIGNAL GROUP SIGNAL Default Description Group signal from load shed function Group signal from network power source

Table 316:
Name PEER_CB_STS PEER_SR_STS PEER_MS_STS PEER_SRC_BLK PEER_SN_BLK PEER_DATA_ER LS_DATA_ER

PPLSGGIO Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description CB status of adjacent electrical area Spinning reserve status of adjacent electrical area Must shed status extended from adjacent electrical area Connectivity and CB block status of adjacent electrical area Subnetwork LS block status of adjacent electrical area Data error of adjacent electrical area Load shed data error for adjacent electrical area

7.11.6

Monitored data
Table 317:
Name PEER_CB_STS PEER_SR_STS PEER_MS_STS

PPLSGGIO Monitored data

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Values (Range) 0=Open 1=Close 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit Description CB status of adjacent electrical area Spinning reserve status of adjacent electrical area Must shed status extended from adjacent electrical area

Table continues on next page 298 PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 7 Power management functions

Name PEER_SRC_BLK Type BOOLEAN Values (Range) 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE 0=FALSE 1=TRUE Unit Description Connectivity and CB block status of adjacent electrical area Subnetwork LS block status of adjacent electrical area Data error of adjacent electrical area Load shed data error for adjacent electrical area Load shed data error for adjacent electrical area Spinning reserve of adjacent electrical area Must shed power extended from adjacent electrical area

PEER_SN_BLK

BOOLEAN

PEER_DATA_ER LS_DATA_ER LS_DATA PEER_SP_RSV PEER_MUST_LS

BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER REAL REAL

kW kW

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

299

300

1MRS757256 D

Section 8 Control functions

Section 8

Control functions

8.1
8.1.1

Position evaluation POS_EVAL

Identification
Function description Position evaluation IEC 61850 identification POS_EVAL IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device number -

8.1.2

Function block
POSITION POS_EVAL OPENPOS CLOSEPOS IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 150:

POS_EVAL function block

8.1.3

Functionality
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS. The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

8.1.4

Operation principle
Position including quality
POSITION POS_EVAL OPENPOS CLOSEPOS

Open/close position of switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 151:

Logic diagram

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not used.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

301

Section 8 Control functions

Input position (Value) 0 (Breaker intermediate) 1 (Breaker open) 2 (Breaker closed) 3 (Breaker faulty) Any Any Signal quality Good Good Good Good Invalid Oscillatory Output OPENPOS 0 1 0 0 0 0

1MRS757256 D

Output CLOSEPOS 0 0 1 0 0 0

8.1.5

Signals
Table 318:
Name POSITION

POS_EVAL Input signals

Type INTEGER Default 0 Description Position status including quality

Table 319:
Name OPENPOS CLOSEPOS

POS_EVAL Output signals

Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Description Open position Close position

8.1.6

Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).

302

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

Section 9

General function block features

9.1
9.1.1

Definite time characteristics

Definite time operation
The DT mode is enabled when the Operating curve type setting is selected either as "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". In the DT mode, the OC_OPR (Overcurrent operate) output of the function is activated when the time calculation exceeds the set Operate delay time. The user can determine the reset in the DT mode with the Reset delay time setting, which provides the delayed reset property when needed. The Type of reset curve setting has no effect on the reset method when the DT mode is selected, but the reset is determined solely with the Reset delay time setting. The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults, for example self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults which may produce high asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It is typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off periods, during which the fault current falls below the set start current, including hysteresis. Without the delayed reset function, the operate timer would reset when the current drops off. In the same way, an apparent drop-off period of the secondary current of the saturated current transformer can also reset the operate timer.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

303

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

Operate time limit

2
Operate timer

1
Reset delay time

Drop-off moment
GUID-3BE350A4-B87A-48C8-8DF4-AD5887952FFC V1 EN

Time

Figure 152:

Operation of the counter in drop-off

In case 1, the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2, the counter is reset immediately, because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero.

304

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

Timer input

OC_STR

OC_OPR

Reset delay time

Reset timer

Operate delay time

Operate timer
GUID-4A7EFE31-446D-43EF-BDEE-E925F2F1C284 V1 EN

Figure 153:

Drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time

When the drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time, as described in Figure 153, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive when the current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The timer input rises when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the OC_STR output and the operate timer starts elapsing. The reset (drop-off) timer starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault disappears. When the reset (dropoff) timer elapses, the operate timer is reset. Since this happens before another start occurs, the OC_OPR output is not activated.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

305

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

Timer input

OC_STR

OC_OPR

Reset delay time

Reset timer

Operate delay time

Operate timer
GUID-172943A9-F4AD-4B8A-A47F-E8BC032EE30D V1 EN

Figure 154:

Drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time

When the drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time, as described in Figure 154, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive when the current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The timer input rises when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the OC_STR output and the operate timer starts elapsing. The Reset (drop-off) timer starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault disappears. Another fault situation occurs before the reset (drop-off) timer has elapsed. This causes the activation of the OC_OPR output, since the operate timer already has elapsed. If the RESET_OC (Overcurrent reset) input is activated when the operate timer is running as described in Figure 155, the operate timer and the reset timer reset. It also resets the OC_STR and OC_OPR outputs.

306

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

Timer input

OC_STR

OC_OPR

RESET_OC

Operate timer Operate delay time

GUID-CD88ED62-C826-4D1E-AB3A-ED6BA538163B V1 EN

Figure 155:

Operating effect of the RESET_OC input

INHIBIT_TRG or SLS_DISABLE or load-shedding blocking conditions of power source PSCSWI function can be used to individually block the OC_STR and OC_OPR signals.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

307

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

Timer input

OC_STR

OC_OPR

Operate timer
Operate delay time

Where, Load shed blocking signal (From Block logic module) INHIBIT_TRG SLS_DISABLE Slow load shed mode Disable
GUID-E69F65A3-5F47-4CD0-8D85-7AC58244EC44 V1 EN

OR

Figure 156:

Operating effect of the slow load shed disable signal

Activation of INHIBIT_TRG or SLS_DISABLE or load-shed blocking conditions of power source PSCSWI function does not reset the timer

9.2
9.2.1

Current-based inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristics

IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
The inverse-time modes, the operation time depends on the momentary value of the current: the higher the current, the faster the operation time. The operation time calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Start value and the OC_STR output is activated.

308

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

The OC_OPR output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inversetime mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used. The curve scaling is determined with the Time multiplier setting. The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT mode, that is, it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming too short. For example

GUID-1EBEDA6B-BB19-422D-8F23-5E5ECA83AF12 V1 EN

Figure 157:

Operate time curves based on IDMT characteristic with the value of the Minimum operate time setting = 0.5 second

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

309

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-E5B35671-200E-4613-9451-F193CE806C2B V1 EN

Figure 158:

Operate time curves based on IDMT characteristic with the value of the Minimum operate time setting = 1 second

9.2.1.1

Standard inverse-time characteristics

For inverse-time operation, both IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The operate times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A, B and C. The values of the coefficients can be calculated according to the formula.

310

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

A t[ s ] = + Bk c I 1 I >
GUID-B1368633-DB3A-4922-AB7D-A14F1284C6C9 V1 EN

(Equation 20)

t[s] I I> k

Operate time in seconds measured current set Start value set Time multiplier

Curve name (1) ANSI Extremely Inverse (2) ANSI Very Inverse (3) ANSI Normal Inverse (4) ANSI Moderately Inverse (6) Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse (9) IEC Normal Inverse (10) IEC Very Inverse (11) IEC Inverse (12) IEC Extremely Inverse (13) IEC Short Time Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse

A 28.2 19.61 0.0086 0.0515 64.07 28.55 0.086 0.14 13.5 0.14 80.0 0.05 120

B 0.1217 0.491 0.0185 0.1140 0.250 0.712 0.185 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

C 2.0 2.0 0.02 0.02 2.0 2.0 0.02 0.02 1.0 0.02 2.0 0.04 1.0

The maximum guaranteed measured current is 50 x In for the current protection. When the set Start value exceeds 1.00 x In, the turn point where the theoretical IDMT characteristics are leveling out to the definite time can be calculated with the formula as shown in the Equation 21.
50 In Start value (Equation 21)

Turn po int =

GUID-B91C49EE-1714-4E58-AEC1-8519CAE57EEE V1 EN

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

311

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-10FF6657-A539-44E3-B349-FDEB20B203FC V1 EN

Figure 159:

ANSI extremely inverse-time characteristics

312

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-B5B7B2FA-3337-4FC1-922B-49C549C89498 V1 EN

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

313

Section 9 General function block features

Figure 160: ANSI very inverse-time characteristics

1MRS757256 D

GUID-D6E1F6E3-69FE-4816-A970-B1E51230831E V1 EN

Figure 161:

ANSI normal inverse-time characteristics

314

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-280097D9-3202-40AB-915F-9CB2FA60F2EE V1 EN

Figure 162:

ANSI moderately inverse-time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

315

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-4D6C2DA6-9D8F-4839-85DD-C0AB970B2AE1 V1 EN

Figure 163:

ANSI long-time extremely inverse-time characteristics

316

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-9E2C691C-D58D-4901-98CE-F16E43BED7FA V1 EN

Figure 164:

ANSI long-time very inverse-time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

317

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-09BDCAC4-F2D6-42B0-827A-41E45F483E91 V1 EN

Figure 165:

ANSI long-time inverse-time characteristics

318

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-A54536C7-77CC-4274-9F9D-FCA4D96E077C V1 EN

Figure 166:

IEC normal inverse-time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

319

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-EB244AA4-E7E4-4DAA-BCC3-2D6417A12BD5 V1 EN

Figure 167:

IEC very inverse-time characteristics

320

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-5213A02A-090C-4435-B871-A15968ACBD4E V1 EN

Figure 168:

IEC inverse-time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

321

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-1DFE4798-F6F5-4372-94E0-DC3C6649A468 V1 EN

Figure 169:

IEC extremely inverse-time characteristics

322

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-E7FA6E7B-66BE-49DA-A8B0-0B43EA407AF0 V1 EN

Figure 170:

IEC short-time inverse-time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

323

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-87145321-935F-4167-8DBB-EEDF16FB2C03 V1 EN

Figure 171:

IEC long-time inverse-time characteristics

324

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

User-programmable inverse-time characteristics
The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard formula.

9.2.1.2

GUID-775FD6DE-7F45-4112-A154-79F599BBA74F V1 EN

(Equation 22)

t[s] A B C E I I> k

Operate time (in seconds) set Curve parameter A set Curve parameter B set Curve parameter C set Curve parameter E Measured current set Start value set Time multiplier

9.2.1.3

RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics

The RI-type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays. The RD-type is an earth-fault specific characteristic. The RI-type is calculated using the formula
k t[ s ] = I > 0.339 0.236 I
GUID-93D85F4E-FBFC-4B6D-BEF8-CBB1E8DCDB0D V1 EN

(Equation 23)

The RD-type is calculated using the formula

I t[ s ] = 5.8 1.35 In kI >
GUID-0624AC12-4B2A-43E7-8357-9D8EA9B38689 V1 EN

(Equation 24)

t[s] k I I>

Operate time (in seconds) set Time multiplier Measured current set Start value

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

325

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

GUID-061E6CD8-FF71-4D8E-B36A-D2A36E98E94F V1 EN

Figure 172:

RI-type inverse-time characteristics

326

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

GUID-AAE3BB7C-7CC5-42A7-8CD3-27B050812D7C V1 EN

Figure 173:

RD-type inverse-time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

327

Section 9 General function block features 9.2.2 Reset in inverse-time modes

1MRS757256 D

The user can select the reset characteristics by using the Type of reset curve setting.
Table 320:
Setting name

Values for reset mode

Possible values 1=Immediate 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset

Type of reset curve

Immediate reset
If the Type of reset curve setting in a drop-off case is selected as "Immediate", the inverse timer resets immediately.

Definite time reset

The definite type of reset in the inverse-time mode can be achieved by setting the Type of reset curve parameter to Def time reset. As a result, the operate inversetime counter is frozen for the time determined with the Reset delay time setting after the current drops below the set Start value, including hysteresis.The integral sum of the inverse-time counter is reset, if another start does not occur during the reset delay. If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as Def time reset, the current level has no influence on the reset characteristic.

Inverse reset
Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and userprogrammable curves. If you use other curve types, immediate reset occurs. Standard delayed inverse reset The reset characteristic required in ANSI (IEEE) inverse-time modes is provided by setting the Type of reset curve parameter to Inverse reset. In this mode, the time delay for reset is given with the following formula using the coefficient D, which has its values defined in the table below.
D k t[ s ] = 2 I 1 I >
A060817 V3 EN

(Equation 25)

328

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

t[s] Reset time (in seconds) k I I> set Time multiplier Measured current set Start value

Table 321:
Curve name

Coefficients for ANSI delayed inverse reset curves

D 29.1 21.6 0.46 4.85 30 13.46 4.6

(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse (2) ANSI Very Inverse (3) ANSI Normal Inverse (4) ANSI Moderately Inverse (6) Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

329

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

A070828 V1 EN

Figure 174:

ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics

330

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

A070829 V1 EN

Figure 175:

ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

331

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

A070830 V1 EN

Figure 176:

ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics

332

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

A070831 V1 EN

Figure 177:

ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

333

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

A070832 V1 EN

Figure 178:

ANSI long-time extremely inverse reset time characteristics

334

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

A070833 V1 EN

Figure 179:

ANSI long-time very inverse reset time characteristics

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

335

Section 9 General function block features

1MRS757256 D

A070834 V1 EN

Figure 180:

ANSI long-time inverse reset time characteristics

The delayed inverse-time reset is not available for IEC-type inverse time curves. User-programmable delayed inverse reset

336

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 9 General function block features

The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the following formula using the set Curve parameter D.
D k t[ s ] = 2 I 1 I >
A060817 V3 EN

(Equation 26)

t[s] Reset time (in seconds) k D I I> set Time multiplier set Curve parameter D Measured current set Start value

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

337

338

1MRS757256 D

Section 10 IED physical connections

Section 10

IED physical connections

10.1

Protective earth connections

The IED shall be earthed with a 16.0 mm2 flat copper cable. The earth lead should be as short as possible, distance to nearest eartning point shall be less than 1500 mm.

GUID-A0C4D952-239C-46BE-8156-25450B1AB7BE V1 EN

Figure 181:

Protective earth pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the 4U half 19 case

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

339

Section 10 IED physical connections

1MRS757256 D

10.2
10.2.1

Inputs
Measuring inputs
Each terminal for CTs/VTs is dimensioned for one wire of 0.5...6.0 mm2 or for two wires of maximum 2.5 mm2.
Table 322:
Terminal X101-1, 2 X101-3, 4 X101-5, 6 X101-7, 8 X101-9, 10 X102-1, 2 X102-3, 4 X102-5, 6 X102-7, 8 X102-9, 10

PML630 modules
AIMA01A 1KHL178083R0008 CT CT CT CT None VT VT VT VT VT AIMA05A 1KHL178083R0013 CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT VT VT

10.2.2

Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X430-1 and X430-2/3 or X410-1 and X410-2/3. The terminals used depend on the power supply and the IED case size. The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on the device label on the side of the IED.
Table 323:
Case 4U half 19

Auxiliary voltage supply of 110...250 V DC or 100...240 V AC

Terminal X430-1 X430-3 Description - Input + Input

Table 324:
Case 4U half 19

Auxiliary voltage supply of 48-125 V DC

Terminal X430-1 X430-2 Description - Input + Input

340

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 10 IED physical connections Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, for status indications, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of IED settings. Each signal connector terminal is dimensioned for one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or for two 0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.
Table 325:
Terminal

10.2.3

Binary inputs X304,4U half 19

Description Hardware module instance COM_101 COM_101 COM_101 COM_101 ACT info Hardware channel

X304-1 X304-2 X304-3 X304-4 X304-5 X304-6 X304-7 X304-8 X304-9 X304-10 X304-11 X304-12 X304-13 X304-14 X304-15 X304-16 X304-17 X304-18

Common - for inputs 1-4 Binary input 1 + Binary input 2 + Binary input 3 + Binary input 4 + Common - for inputs 5-8 Binary input 5 + Binary input 6 + Binary input 7 + Binary input 8 + Common - for inputs 9-11 Binary input 9 + Binary input 10 + Binary input 11 + Common - for inputs 12-14 Binary input 12 + Binary input 13 + Binary input 14 + COM_101 COM_101 COM_101 BI12 BI13 BI14 COM_101 COM_101 COM_101 BI9 BI10 BI11 COM_101 COM_101 COM_101 COM_101 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4

10.3
10.3.1

Outputs
IRF
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision system of the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of the two contacts is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact closes.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

341

Section 10 IED physical connections

1MRS757256 D

Each signal connector terminal is dimensioned for one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or for two 0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.
Table 326:
Case 4U half 19

IRF contact X329

Terminal X329-1 X329-2 X329-3 Description Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected IRF, common

10.4

Communication connections
The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes. Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with the galvanic RJ-45 or optical LC Ethernet connection. The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/ HMI connector must not be used for any other purpose. An external HMI can be used only when the IED has no integrated HMI.

10.4.1

Ethernet RJ-45 front connection

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use. The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the PC side has to be configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically. There is a DHCP server inside IED for the front interface only. The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and disturbance records can be read via the front communication port. Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time. PCM600 LHMI WHMI

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 192.168.0.254. The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable is used with the front port. If IED is ordered without LHMI then LAN1 port has to be used for configuration and setting purposes. The default IP address for the LAN1 port is 192.168.2.10. DHCP is not available from LAN1 port.

342

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 10 IED physical connections Ethernet connection for station communication

The default IP address of the IED through the Ethernet connection is 192.168.2.10. The physical connector is X1/LAN1. The interface speed is 100 Mbps both for the 100BASE-FX LC alternative and for the 100BASE-TX RJ-45 alternative.

10.4.2

10.4.3

Optical serial rear connection

Serial communication can be used via optical connection in star topology. Connector type is glass (ST connector). Connection's idle state is indicated either with light on or light off. The physical connector is X9/Rx,Tx.

10.4.4

Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 327:
Protocol

Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Ethernet 100BASE-TX RJ-45 100BASE-FX LC Serial Glass fibre (ST connector) -

IEC 6185081 = Supported

10.4.5

Recommended third-party industrial Ethernet switches

RuggedCom RS900 RuggedCom RS1600 RuggedCom RSG2100

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

343

Section 10 IED physical connections

1MRS757256 D

10.5
PML630

Terminal diagrams
PML630

GUID-08E1236F-9950-419F-96D1-EF92AAD1A9D9 V3 EN

GUID-AE84E3A7-635E-4758-98D2-35E6038422D0 V1 EN

Figure 182:

PML630 terminal diagram (4 CT, 5 VT) Figure 183:

PML630 terminal diagram (8 CT, 2 VT)

344

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 11 Technical data

Section 11

Technical data

Table 328:
Description Width Height Depth Weight box Weight LHMI

Dimensions of the IED - half 19" rack

Value 220 mm 177 mm 249.5 mm 6.2 kg 1.0 kg

Table 329:
Description Uauxnominal

Power supply
600PSM02 100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V AC, 50 and 60 Hz 110, 125, 220, 250 V DC 600PSM03 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC

Uauxvariation

85...110% of Un (85...264 V AC) 80...120% of Un (88...300 V DC)

80...120% of Un (38.4...150 V DC)

Maximum load of auxiliary voltage supply Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Maximum interruption time in the auxiliary DC voltage without resetting the IED Power supply input must be protected by an external miniature circuit breaker

35 W Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 Hz) 50 ms at Uaux

For example, type S282 UC-K. The rated maximum load of aux voltage which is given as 35 watts. Depending on the voltage used, select a suitable MCB based on the respective current. Type S282 UC-K has a rated current of 0.75 A at 400 V AC.

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

345

Section 11 Technical data

1MRS757256 D

Table 330:
Description Rated frequency Operating range Current inputs

Energizing inputs
Value 50/60 Hz Rated frequency 5 Hz Rated current, In Thermal withstand capability: Continuously For 1 s For 10 s 4A 100 A 25 A 20 A 500 A 100 A 0.1/0.5 A1) 1/5 A2)

Dynamic current withstand: Half-wave value 250 A <100 m 1250 A <20 m

Input impedance Voltage inputs Rated voltage, Un Voltage withstand: Continuous For 10 s

100 V AC/ 110 V AC/ 115 V AC/ 120 V AC

425 V AC 450 V AC <0.05 VA

Burden at rated voltage 1) Residual current 2) Phase currents or residual current

Table 331:
Description Operating range Rated voltage Current drain

Binary inputs
Value Maximum input voltage 300 V DC 24...250 V DC 1.6...1.8 mA <0.3 W 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of 1% of the rated voltage)

Power consumption/input Threshold voltage

Table 332:
Description Rated voltage

Signal output and IRF output

Value 250 V AC/DC 5A 10 A 15 A 0.5 A/0.1 A/0.04 A 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC

Continuous contact carry Make and carry for 3.0 s Make and carry 0.5 s Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time constant L/R<40 ms, at U< 48/110/220 V DC Minimum contact load

346

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 11 Technical data

Table 333:
Ethernet interface LAN1 (X1)

Ethernet interfaces
Protocol TCP/IP protocol Cable Fibre-optic cable with LC connector or shielded twisted pair CAT 5e cable or better Data transfer rate 100 MBits/s

Table 334:
Wave length 1300 nm

Fibre-optic communication link

Fibre type MM 62.5/125 m glass fibre core Connector LC Permitted path attenuation1) <8 dB Distance 2 km

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Table 335:
Type

X4/IRIG-B interface
Protocol IRIG-B Cable Shielded twisted pair cable Recommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (98419844) or Alpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)

Screw terminal, pin row header

Table 336:
Wave length 820 nm 820 mm 660 mm

X9 Optical serial interface characteristics

Fibre type MM 62.5/125 MM 50/125 1 mm Connector ST ST Snap-in Permitted path attenuation 4 dB/km 4 dB/km Distance 1000 m 400 m 10 m

Table 337:
Description Front side

Degree of protection of flush-mounted IED

Value IP 40 IP 20

Rear side, connection terminals

Table 338:
Description Front and side

Degree of protection of the LHMI

Value IP 42

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

347

Section 11 Technical data

1MRS757256 D

Table 339:
Description

Environmental conditions
Value -25...+55C (continuous) -40...+85C (<16 h) Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of -25...+55C <93%, non-condensing 86...106 kPa up to 2000 m -40...+85C

Operating temperature range Short-time service temperature range

Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure Altitude Transport and storage temperature range

Table 340:
Description

Environmental tests
Type test value 96 h at +55C 16 h at +85C 96 h at -25C 16 h at -40C 6 cycles at +2555C, Rh >93% 96 h at -40C 96 h at +85C Reference IEC 60068-2-2

Dry heat test (humidity <50%)

Cold test

IEC 60068-2-1

Damp heat test, cyclic

IEC 60068-2-30

Storage test

IEC 60068-2-48

348

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 12 IED and functionality tests

Section 12

IED and functionality tests

Table 341:
Description

Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Type test value Reference IEC 61000-4-18, level 3 IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV 1.0 kV IEC 61000-4-18 IEC 60255-22-1, class III 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-2, level 4 IEC 60255-22-2 IEEE C37.90.3.2001 8 kV 15 kV

100 kHz and 1 MHz burst disturbance test Common mode Differential mode

3 MHz, 10 MHz and 30 MHz burst disturbance test Common mode

Electrostatic discharge test

Contact discharge Air discharge

Radio frequency interference tests Conducted, common mode Radiated, pulsemodulated Radiated, amplitudemodulated 10 V (rms), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3 IEC 60255-22-6 ENV 50204 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3, level 3 IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60255-22-4, class A 4 kV IEC 61000-4-5, level 3/2 IEC 60255-22-5 1 kV line-to-earth 2 kV line-to-earth 1 kV line-to-line 4 kV line-to-earth, 2 kV line-toline IEC 61000-4-8

10 V/m (rms), f=900 MHz

10 V/m (rms), f=80...2700 MHz

Fast transient disturbance tests All ports

Surge immunity test Communication Binary inputs, voltage inputs Other ports

Power frequency (50 Hz) magnetic field Table continues on next page

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

349

Section 12 IED and functionality tests

Description 1...3 s Continuous Type test value 1000 A/m 300 A/m 1000 A/m 6.4/16 s IEC 61000-4-9 IEC 61000-4-10 100 A/m 400 transients/s Binary inputs only 300 V rms 150 V rms 15 Hz...150 kHz Test level 3 (10/1/10 V rms) 30%/10 ms 60%/100 ms 60%/1000 ms >95%/5000 ms IEC 61000-4-16 IEC 61000-4-11 Reference

1MRS757256 D

Pulse magnetic field immunity test Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity test 2s 1 MHz

Power frequency immunity test Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-22-7, class A IEC 61000-4-16

Conducted common mode disturbances Voltage dips and short interruptions

Electromagnetic emission tests Conducted, RF-emission (mains terminal) < 79 dB(V) quasi peak < 66 dB(V) average < 73 dB(V) quasi peak < 60 dB(V) average

EN 55011, class A IEC 60255-25

0.15...0.50 MHz 0.5...30 MHz Radiated RF-emission

30...230 MHz 230...1000 MHz

< 40 dB(V/m) quasi peak, measured at 10 m distance < 47 dB(V/m) quasi peak, measured at 10 m distance

Table 342:
Description Dielectric tests: Test voltage

Insulation tests
Type test value Reference IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-27 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min 500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min, communication IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-27

Impulse voltage test: Table continues on next page

350

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 12 IED and functionality tests

Description Test voltage Type test value 5 kV, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J 1 kV, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J, communication IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-27 >100 M, 500 V DC IEC 60255-27 <0.1, 4 A, 60 s Reference

Insulation resistance measurements Isolation resistance

Protective bonding resistance Resistance

Table 343:
Description

Mechanical tests
Reference IEC 60068-2-6 (test Fc) IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60068-2-27 (test Ea shock) IEC 60068-2-29 (test Eb bump) IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 (method A) Requirement Class 1 Class 1

Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Shock and bump test

Seismic test

Class 1

Table 344:
Description LV directive Standard

Product safety
Reference 2006/95/EC EN 60255-27 (2005) EN 60255-1 (2009)

Table 345:
Description EMC directive Standard

EMC compliance
Reference 2004/108/EC EN 50263 (2000) EN 60255-26 (2007)

Table 346:
Description

RoHS compliance

Complies with RoHS directive 2002/95/EC

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

351

352

1MRS757256 D

Section 13 Applicable standards and regulations

Section 13

Applicable standards and regulations

EN 50263 EN 60255-26 EN 60255-27 EMC council directive 2004/108/EC EU directive 2002/96/EC/175 IEC 60255 Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

353

354

1MRS757256 D

Section 14 Glossary

Section 14

Glossary

100BASE-FX

A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard for local area networks (LANs) that uses fibreoptic cabling A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard for local area networks (LANs) that uses twistedpair cabling category 5 or higher with RJ-45 connectors 1. Application Configuration tool in PCM600 2. Trip status in IEC 61850 Analog input module Binary input and output A twisted pair cable type designed for high signal integrity An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications for far end crosstalk Communication Management tool in PCM600 An all-in-one communication gateway, automation platform and user interface solution for utility and industrial distribution substations Compact power management solution Central processing unit Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A distributed network protocol originally developed by Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership of the protocol and assumes responsibility for its evolution. Definite time Electromagnetic compatibility A standard for connecting a family of frame-based computer networking technologies into a LAN First in, first out Graphical Display Editor in PCM600 Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event Global Positioning System Human-machine interface Human-system interface
355

100BASE-TX

ACT AIM BIO CAT 5 CAT 5e CMT COM600

cPMS CPU DHCP DNP3

DT EMC Ethernet FIFO GDE GOOSE GPS HMI HSI

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

Section 14 Glossary

1MRS757256 D

I/O IDMT IEC IEC 61850

Input/output Inverse definite minimum time International Electrotechnical Commission International standard for substation communication and modeling

IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850 standard series IED IP IRF IRIG-B LAN LC LED LHMI MCB MicroSCADA MM MMS MTBF OPC server PC PCM600 PSM PST RIO600 RMS RS-485 RTC RTD Rx SAB600
356

Intelligent electronic device Internet protocol 1. Internal fault 2. Internal relay fault Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format B Local area network Connector type for glass fibre cable Light-emitting diode Local human-machine interface Miniature circuit breaker Substation automation system Multimode 1. Manufacturing message specification 2. Metering management system Mean time between failures A software application that acts as an API or protocol converter 1. Personal computer 2. Polycarbonate Protection and Control IED Manager Power supply module Parameter Setting tool in PCM600 Remote I/O unit Root-mean-square (value) Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real-time clock Resistance temperature detector Receive/Received Substation automation builder tool
PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

1MRS757256 D

Section 14 Glossary

SCS SMAI SMS SMT SNTP ST SW TCP/IP TRM Tx WAN WHMI

Station control system Signal matrix analog input 1. Short Message Service 2. Station monitoring system Signal Matrix tool in PCM600 Simple Network Time Protocol Connector type for glass fibre cable Software Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Transformer input module Transmit/Transmitted Wide area network Web human-machine interface

PML630/Compact Load-Shedding Solution Technical Manual

357

358

359

Contact us

ABB Oy Medium Voltage Products, Distribution Automation P.O. Box 699 FI-65101 VAASA, Finland Phone +358 10 22 11 Fax +358 10 22 41094 www.abb.com/substationautomation

1MRS757256 D Copyright 2013 ABB. All rights reserved.